1. business and industrial
2. construction

PROJECT MANUAL
ALBANY FIRE STATION
Albany, KY
OWNER
City of Albany
Architect
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
CIVIL ENGINEER
MECHANICAL / ELEC ENGINEER
SE Engineering
Arnold Consulting Engineering Services, Inc.
P.O. Box 1338
Bowling Green, KY 42101
SE Engineering
1733 Campus Plaza Court, Suite 10
Bowling Green, KY 42101
Project No.1307
July 31, 2013
PROJECT MANUAL INDEX
DIVISIONS 0-14
ALBANY FIRE STATION
Project Number 1307
Unless noted otherwise, the following shall apply to all manufacturers listed herein. Subject to
compliance with Contract Documents, manufactures listed are approved as a manufacturer only.
This does not imply that specific products supplied by such manufacturers have been reviewed
and comply with requirements. It shall be the manufacturer's / contractor's responsibility to
ensure that all requirements of the Contract Documents are met.
DIVISION 0 – BIDDING AND CONTRACT PROVISIONS
00100
00200
00201
00300
00301
SC
00400
INVITATION TO BID
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR KCDBG FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
FEDERAL AND STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
REQUIRED PROJECT SITE SIGN
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
01026
01027
01030
01035
01040
01200
01300
01400
01420
01500
01600
01631
01700
01710
01740
SUMMARY OF WORK
UNIT PRICES
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
ALTERNATES
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
COORDINATION
PROJECT MEETINGS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY CONTROL
STRUCTURAL TESTING/INSPECTION AGENCY SERVICES
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
SUBSTITUTIONS
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
FINAL CLEANING
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
REFER TO DRAWINGS
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
REFER TO DRAWINGS
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
REFER TO DRAWINGS
DIVISION 5 - METALS
REFER TO DRAWINGS
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
REFER TO DRAWINGS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07241
07841
07920
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (SHEATHING)
FIRE RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08111
08410
08800
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
GLAZING
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09255
09900
09910
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
FLOOR COATING
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10155
10426
10520
10801
SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET PARTITIONS
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
FIRE PROTECTION SPECILATIES
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NONE
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12304
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NONE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NONE
END OF INDEX
DOCUMENT 00100 - INVITATION TO BID
INVITATION
Sealed proposals for the following work will be received by the:
City of Albany
204 Cross Street
Albany, KY 42602
in the manner and on the date herein specified for the furnishing of all labor, materials, supplies,
tools, services, etc., necessary for:
Albany Fire Station
Albany, KY
as set forth in the specifications and drawings prepared by Sewell and Sewell Architects PLLC,
6233 Old Nashville Road, Loop 2 Suite 101, Bowling Green, Kentucky 42104, (270) 904-3388.
BID SUBMITTAL
Contractors must submit their bids prior to: 2:00 p.m. (local time) on Friday, February 07,
2014
Albany Fire Station
Mayor Nicky Smith
204 Cross Street
Albany, KY 42602
Proposals shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope with the following information on the outside,
viz:
"BID DOCUMENTS"
Albany Fire Station
Albany, KY
Time: 2:00 p.m. local time
Date: February 07, 2014
One (1) copy of the completed Form of Proposal will be required from each bidder. Forms of
Proposal shall be completely filled out and submitted prior to the time of bids. Corrections to
information on the Bid Form must be initialed to be valid. Forms of Proposal not completely or
correctly filled out may not be considered.
INVITATION TO BID
00100 - 1
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS REVIEWED
Contract Documents may be examined at the following places:
1.
2.
Sewell and Sewell Architects PLLC, 6233 Old Nashville Road, Bowling Green, KY 42104
City Hall of Albany, 204 Cross Street, Albany, KY 42602
Pre-Bid Conference: A Pre-Bid Conference will be held on January 24, 2014 at 2 p.m.
local time. This Pre-Bid Conference will be conducted by the Architect at City Hall, 204
Cross Street, Albany, KY.
Bid security in the amount of five (5) percent of each Proposal submitted, must accompany each
Proposal in accord with the Form of Proposal.
Obtaining plans and specifications, for bona fide bidders, at Lynn Imaging, 328 Old Vine Street,
Lexington, KY 40507 / Phone: 859-255-1021 in accordance with the following charge schedule.
It is most important that requesting firm identify the position of the firm as to prime
bidder, material supplier, etc. Please give name, address and telephone of person
responsible for receiving addenda material and general communication for this bid.
ALL PRIME CONTRACTORS, MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTORS AND OTHERS:
A deposit check of Sixty Dollars ($60.00) is required per set and is not refundable for hard copies
of the plans and specifications. An additional charge per set will be assessed for all sets shipped
and mailed. Mailing is a separate charge and is not refundable and will need to be made on a
separate check. Contact Lynn Imaging for shipping charges. NO PARTIAL SETS WILL BE
DISTRIBUTED. MAKE CHECKS PAYABLE TO Lynn Imaging.
A PDF file of the drawings and specifications can be emailed to Prime Contractors for NO
charge.
RIGHT TO REJECT AND WAIVER
The Owner’s desire to waive irregularities and informalities as to a bid shall be reviewed and
final judgment made by the Owner.
MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled by the Bidder for a period of sixty (60) days
following the time and date designated for receipt of Bids and Bidder agrees in submitting a Bid.
INVITATION TO BID
00100 - 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Federal and State Prevailing Wage Rates are applicable. Contractor shall pay the higher of the
two between the Federal and Stage Wage Rates when there is a difference.
Prospective contractor to provide a 100% Performance and Payment Bond.
Note: Attention of bidders is particularly called to the requirements as to conditions of
employment to be observed and minimum wage rates to be paid under the contract, Section 3,
Segregated Facilities, Section 109, Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Executive Order
11246, the Anti-Kickback Act, Section 504/ADA requirements, and Section 402 Veterans of the
Vietnam Era clause and Age Discrimination Act of 1975 clause requirements. Local firms,
minority firms, small and female businesses are particularly encouraged to participate. Also, if
the BIDDER anticipates the use of subcontractors as a part of this project, the use of local firms,
minority firms, small and female businesses is encouraged.
END OF SECTION 00100
INVITATION TO BID
00100 - 3
FORM OF PROPOSAL
Albany Fire Station
Albany, Kentucky
This Form of Proposal, consisting of pages FOP-1 through FOP-5 and supplemental FOP Info pages,
shall be used in submitting a proposal for the work. Additional copies of this Form of Proposal will be
furnished upon request by the Architect. In the alternative, the bound form may be photocopied for
submittal purposes.
This Proposal submitted by:______________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
(Name and address of Bidder)
Date:________________________ Telephone:_________________________
To:
City of Albany
204 Cross Street
Albany, KY 42602
(606) 387-6011
To all:
The Bidder, in compliance with the Invitation to Bid, and having carefully examined the contents and
requirements of the Contract Documents as prepared by Sewell and Sewell Architects, PLLC, hereby
proposes to furnish all labor, materials, supplies and services to fulfill the requirements and intent of the
Contract Documents within the time period set forth therein and for the stated Lump Sum Bid Amounts.
The Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:
Addendum No.________Dated________
Addendum No.________Dated________
Addendum No.________Dated________
Addendum No.________Dated________
(If none have been issued and received, insert the word "none").
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FOP - 1
LUMP SUM BASE BID:
The Bidder agrees to furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment and services required to complete
the construction of the project titled: Albany Fire Station, Albany, KY, in accordance with the issued
Contract Documents along with any duly issued Addenda for the lump sum bid amount set forth as
follows:
Dollars
(use words)
and
(use words)
Cents($___________________________)
(use numbers)
In the event that the Owner exercises his option to incorporate any or all of the Alternates, the bidder
further agrees to furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment and services associated with the listed
alternates.
ALT. #1 – ADD / DEDUCT
Provide additional truck bay per construction drawings.
Add / Deduct the sum of:________________________
______________________________________Dollars.
ALT. #2 – ADD / DEDUCT
Provide brick veneer per construction drawings.
Add / Deduct the sum of:________________________
______________________________________Dollars.
BIDDERS ARE CAUTIONED TO SIGN THE FORM OF PROPOSAL: FAILURE TO SIGN THE
FORM OF PROPOSAL INVALIDATES THE BID.
SIGNED BY: _____________________________________________________
TITLE: __________________________________________________________
FIRM: ___________________________________________________________
ADDRESS: _______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
TELEPHONE: ____________________________________________________
DATE: ......................................................................................................................
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FOP - 2
PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL:
Preparation of Bid: Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed form and accompanied by
Certification of Bidder Regarding Equal Employment Opportunity, Form 950.1; Certification of Bidder
(Contractor) Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, Form 1421; Certification
of Bidder Regarding Section 3 and Segregated Facilities: and Contractor Eligibility Certification
Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibilities. All blank spaces for bid prices must be
filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures, and the foregoing Certifications must be fully
completed and executed when submitted.
Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his/her
address, and the name of the project for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded by mail, the sealed
envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed as specified in the bid form.
Subcontracts: The bidder is specifically advised that any person, for, or other party to whom it is
proposed to award a subcontract under this contract:
a.
Must be acceptable to the Owner and have current eligibility status for federal programs; and
b.
Must submit Form 950.2, Certification by Proposed Subcontractor Regarding Equal Employment
Opportunity, Certification of Proposed Subcontractor Regarding Section 3 and Segregated Facilities, and
Subcontractor Eligibility Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibilities.
Approval of the proposed subcontract award cannot be given by the Owner unless and until the proposed
subcontractor has submitted the Certifications and/or other evidence showing that it has fully complied
with any reporting requirements to which it is or was subject. Although the bidder is not required to
attach such Certifications by proposed subcontractors to his/her bid, the bidder is here advised of this
requirement so that appropriate action can be taken to prevent subsequent delay in subcontract awards.
The following items are also herewith enclosed as required:
1.
List of Proposed Subcontractors.
2.
List of Materials and Equipment.
4.
List of Unit Prices
5.
Bid bond guaranty in the amount of not less than 5 percent (5%) of the Lump Sum Base Bid.
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FOP - 3
LIST OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS:
All subcontractors are subject to the approval of Sewell and Sewell Architects, PLLC and the Owner
If certain branches of the work are to be done by the General Contractor, so state.
The following list of branches of work must be filled in and submitted with the Bidder's Proposal:
BRANCH OF WORK
A.
SUBCONTRACTOR
ARCHITECTURAL:
1.
Concrete
___________________________________
2.
Rough & Finish Carpentry
___________________________________
3.
Masonry
___________________________________
4.
Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames
___________________________________
Alum. Storefront Doors
and Windows
___________________________________
6.
Drywall Work
___________________________________
7.
Pre-Engineered Building
___________________________________
8.
Acoustical Tile Ceilings
____________________________________
9.
Priming / Painting
___________________________________
10.
Casework
___________________________________
11.
Floor and Wall Tile
___________________________________
12.
Insulation
___________________________________
13.
Overhead Doors
___________________________________
14.
Finished Concrete Flooring ___________________________________
B.
MECHANICAL
1.
Mechanical
___________________________________
2.
Plumbing
___________________________________
5.
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FOP - 4
3.
Sheet Metal
___________________________________
4
Insulation
___________________________________
5.
HVAC Controls
___________________________________
C.
ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR
1.
Electrical
___________________________________
2.
Lighting
___________________________________
3.
Data / T.V.
___________________________________
FORM OF PROPOSAL
FOP - 5
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FOR
Albany Fire Station
UNIT PRICES:
All bidders have (1) hour following opening of bids to provide the unit prices of their bid in the FOP
and FOP Information forms.
The unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of
measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate
modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased
or decreased.
Unit prices represent work-in-place costs and include all necessary material, cost for delivery,
installation, insurance, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes.
List Of Unit Prices
Description Of Work
Unit Price
SITE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Excavation
A. Mass Excavation
B. Trench Excavation
C. Remove and replace unsuitable soils (with onsite fill)
D. Top soil placement
Downspout with concrete splash block
6” Pipe Installed
8” Pipe Installed
12” Pipe Installed
Asphalt
A. Heavy Duty Asphalt Paving
B. Light Duty Asphalt Paving
C. DGA – Compacted in place
D. Stone Aggregate
Concrete
A. Concrete Walk
B. Concrete Pavement
C. Wheel Stop
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
/c.y.
/c.y.
/c.y.
/c.y.
/ea.
/l.f.
/l.f.
/l.f.
$
/ton
$_________/ton
$
/ton
$
/ton
$
$
$
/s.y.
/s.y.
/ea.
$
$
$
$
$
$
$
/s.f.
/s.f.
/s.f.
/s.f.
/s.f.
/s.f.
/l.f.
ARCHITECTURAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8” CMU in place (material and labor)
8” concrete slab
4” concrete slab
Finished concrete flooring system
Painting, gyp. bd. walls
Porcelain floor tile
Resilient wall base
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FOP INFO - 1
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Ceramic wall tile
(1) hollow metal door and frame w/hardware
3 5/8” metal stud with gyp. each side
Metal Roof System
Brick Veneer
Reinforcing steel
Acoustical panel ceiling “A”
Horizontal Shaft wall system at corridor
$
/s.f.
$
/ea.
$
/s.f.
$
/s.f.
$
/s.f.
$
/ton
$
/s.f.
$________/s.f.
MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL / PLUMBING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Unclassified Utility Trenching with Compacted Backfill
120V, 20A Duplex Outlet
120V, 20A Ground Fault Outlet
Single Pole Light Switch
3-Way Light Switch
Occupancy Sensor
Single Gang Metal Box
20 Amp 1 Pole Breaker
Type ‘A’ Light Fixture
Type ‘B’ Light Fixture
Type ‘C8’ Light Fixture
Type ‘D’ Light Fixture
Type ‘E’ Light Fixture
Type ‘EXR’ Light Fixture
Type ‘REH’ Light Fixture
Type ‘EM’ Light Fixture
Type ‘EX’ Light Fixture
Type ‘WP’ Light Fixture
Voice/Data Cable
Voice/Data Outlet
$
/linear ft.
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$
/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$_________/each
$
/linear ft.
$
/each
LIST OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
Bidders are hereby advised that this list shall be filled out completely by the apparent low bidder within one
(1) hour from the close of the official reading of the bids.
The above requirement does not preclude any bidder from submitting this list, fully executed, at the time the
bids are submitted if they so choose.
Each item listed under the different phases of construction must be clearly identified so that the Owner will
definitely know what the bidder proposes to furnish.
The use of a manufacturer or dealer's name only or stating "as per plans and specifications" will not be
considered as sufficient identification.
Where more than one "make" or "brand" is listed for any one item, the Owner has the right to select the one to
be used.
Failure to submit a proper list may result in rejection of the bidder's proposal.
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FOP INFO - 2
GENERAL:
MANUFACTURER MODEL OR TYPE
1.
Paint
_________________________________
2.
Signage
_________________________________
3.
Pre-Engineered Building
_________________________________
4.
Tile Supplier
_________________________________
5.
CMU Supplier
_________________________________
6.
Acoustical Ceilings
_________________________________
7.
Concrete Supplier
_________________________________
8.
H.M. Doors and Frames
_________________________________
9.
Aluminum Storefront Doors
_________________________________
10.
Locksets
_________________________________
11.
Lockers Supplier
_________________________________
12.
Brick Veneer
_________________________________
13.
Aluminum Storefront Windows
_________________________________
14.
Laminate Casework
_________________________________
MPE LIST OF MATERIALS/MANUFACTURERS
1.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
_________________________________
2.
VALVES
_________________________________
3.
HVAC UNITS
_________________________________
4.
DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES
_________________________________
5.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
_________________________________
6.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
_________________________________
7.
TEMPERATURE/HVAC CONTROLS
_________________________________
8.
ELECTRIC PANEL BOARDS
_________________________________
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FOP INFO - 3
9.
ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR
_________________________________
10.
STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS
_________________________________
11.
WIRING DEVICES
_________________________________
12.
LIGHT FIXTURES
_________________________________
13.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
_________________________________
END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FORM OF PROPOSAL INFORMATION
FOP INFO - 4
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
KCDBG FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
KCDBG CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Table of Contents
1.
Information for Bidders
2.
Bid Bond Form
3.
4.
Certification of Bidder Regarding Equal Employment Opportunity, including
Prohibition on Non-segregated Facilities
Certification of Bidder Regarding Section 3
5.
Contractor Section 3 Plan Format
6.
Certification by Proposed Subcontractor Regarding Equal Employment
Opportunity, including Prohibition on Non-segregated Facilities
Certification of Proposed Subcontractor Regarding Section 3
7.
8.
9.
Contractor’s Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage
Requirements
Contract Form
10.
Bonding and Insurance Requirements
11.
Certificate of Owner’s Attorney
12.
General Conditions Table of Contents
13.
General Conditions Including Federal Labor Standards
14.
Supplemental General Conditions Including Equal Opportunity Provisions
The contract document must include all the items contained in the bid package as well as an
executed contract, bid proposal, executed contractor certifications and executed bond and
insurance forms.
1.
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
1. Receipt and Opening of Bids
The
City of Albany
(herein called the “Owner”), invites bids on the form
attached hereto, all blanks lf which must be appropriately filled in. Bids will be received by
the Owner at the office of City Hall
until 2:00
o’clock p.m., CST, February 07
, 2014, and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud.
The Owner may consider informal any bid not prepared and submitted in accordance with the
provisions hereof and may waive any informalities or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be
withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized
postponement thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not be
considered. No bidder may withdraw a bid within __60___ days after the date of the opening
thereof.
2. Preparation of Bid: Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed form and accompanied by
Certification of Bidder Regarding Equal Employment Opportunity, Form 950.1; Certification of
Bidder (Contractor) Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage Requirements, Form
1421; Certification of Bidder Regarding Section 3 and Segregated Facilities: and Contractor
Eligibility Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibilities. All
blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures,
and the foregoing Certifications must be fully completed and executed when submitted.
Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the
bidder, his/her address, and the name of the project for which the bid is submitted. If forwarded
by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope
addressed as specified in the bid form.
3. Subcontracts: The bidder is specifically advised that any person, for, or other party to whom
it is proposed to award a subcontract under this contract:
a. Must be acceptable to the Owner and have current eligibility status for federal
programs; and
b. Must submit Form 950.2, Certification by Proposed Subcontractor Regarding
Equal Employment Opportunity, Certification of Proposed Subcontractor
Regarding Section 3 and Segregated Facilities, and Subcontractor Eligibility
Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension and Other Responsibilities.
Approval of the proposed subcontract award cannot be given by the Owner unless
and until the proposed subcontractor has submitted the Certifications and/or other
evidence showing that it has fully complied with any reporting requirements to
which it is or was subject. Although the bidder is not required to attach such
Certifications by proposed subcontractors to his/her bid, the bidder is here advised
of this requirement so that appropriate action can be taken to prevent subsequent
delay in subcontract awards.
Conditions of Work: Each bidder must inform him/herself fully of the conditions relating to
the construction of the project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will
not relieve a successful bidder of his/her obligation to furnish all material and labor
necessary to carry out the provisions of his/her contract. Insofar as possible, the contractor,
in carrying out the work, must employ such methods or means as will not cause any
interruption of or interference with the work of any other contractor.
4.
Telegraphic/Facsimile Modification: Any bidder may modify his/her bid by
telegraphic or facsimile communication at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for
receipt of bids, provided such communication is received by the Owner prior to the closing
time, and provided further, the Owner is satisfied that a written confirmation of the
telegraphic/facsimile modification over the signature of the bidder was mailed prior to the
closing time. The communication should not reveal the bid price but should provide the
addition or subtraction or other modification so that the final prices or terms will not be known
by the Owner until the sealed bid is opened. If written confirmation is received within two days
from the closing time, no consideration will be given to the telegraphic/facsimile modification.
5. Method of Bidding: The Owner invites the following bid(s):
(New Fire Station for the City of Albany)
6.
Qualifications of Bidder: The Owner may make such investigations as s/he deems
necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall
furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation
of, such bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the
obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids
will not be accepted.
.
7.
Bid Security: Each bid must be accompanied by cash, certified check of the bidder,
or a bid bond prepared on the Bid Bond Form attached hereto, duly executed by the bidder
as principal and having as surety thereon a surety company approved by the Owner, in the
amount of 5% of the bid. Such cash, checks or bid bonds will be returned promptly after the
Owner and the accepted bidder have executed the contract, or if no award has been made
within 30 days after the date of the opening of bids, upon demand of the bidder at any time
thereafter, so long as he/she has not been notified of the acceptance of his/her bid.
8. Liquidated Damages for Failure to Enter into Contract: The successful bidder, upon his/her
failure or refusal to execute and deliver the contract and bonds required within 10 days after
s/he has received notice of the acceptance of his/her bid, shall forfeit to the Owner, as
liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his/her bid.
9. Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages: Bidder must agree to commence work on or
before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully
complete- the project within _____ consecutive calendar days thereafter. Bidder must agree
also to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $
for each consecutive calendar
day thereafter as hereinafter provided in the General Conditions.
Addenda and Interpretations: No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications
or other pre-bid documents will be made to any bidder orally.
Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to
___Nick Sewell____at
Sewell and Sewell Architects
and to be given consideration must be received at least five days prior to the date fixed for
the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will
be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be mailed by
certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective
addresses furnished for such purposes), not later than three days prior to the date fixed for
the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation
shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation under his/her bid as submitted. All addenda
so issued shall become part of the contract documents.
Security for Faithful Performance: Simultaneously with his/her delivery of the executed
contract, the contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for faithful
performance of this contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the
project under this contract and furnishing materials in connection with this contract, as
specified in the General Conditions included herein. The surety on such bond or bonds
shall be a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner.
Power of Attorney: Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with
each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney.
Notice of Special Conditions: Attention is particularly called to those parts of the contract
documents and specifications which deal with the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Inspection and testing of materials.
Insurance requirements.
Wage rates.
Stated allowances.
Laws and Regulations: The bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable State
laws, municipal ordinances and the rules and regulations of all authorities having
jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to the contract throughout, and they
will be deemed to be included in the contract the same as though herein written in full.
Method of Award - Lowest Qualified Bidder: If at the time this contract is to be awarded, the
lowest base bid submitted by a responsible bidder does not exceed the amount of funds
then estimated by the Owner as available to finance the contract, the contract will be
awarded on the base bid only. If such bid exceeds such amount, the Owner may reject all
bids or may award the contract on the base bid combined with such deductible alternates
applied in numerical order in which they are listed in the Form of Bid, as produces a net
amount which is within the available funds. If all bids exceed funds available to finance the
contract once all deductive alternatives have been applied, the
2.
BID BOND FORM
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned,
as Principal, and
as Surety, are
hereby held and firmly bound unto
as owner in the penal sum of
for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we
hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns. Signed this
day of
, 20
.
The Condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to
a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to
enter into a contract in writing, for the
Now, THEREFOR,
(a.) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate.
(b.) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a
contract in the Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in
accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance
of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or
furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects
perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid
Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being
expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder
shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety,
and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the
Owner may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,
and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and
these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above.
Principal
Surety
SEAL
By:
3.
CERTIFICATION OF BIDDER REGARDING EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
CERTIFICATION OF BIDDER
REGARDING EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
Instructions
This certification is required pursuant to Executive Order 11246 (30 F.R. 12319-25). The
Implementing rules and regulations provide that any bidder or prospective contractor, or any of
their proposed subcontractors, shall state as an initial part of the bid or negotiations of the contract
whether it has participated in any previous contract or subcontract subject to the equal opportunity
clause, and if so, whether it has filed all compliance reports due under applicable instructions.
Where the certification indicates that the bidder has not filed a compliance report due under
applicable instructions, such bidder shall be required to submit a compliance report within seven
calendar days after bid opening. No contract shall be awarded unless such report is submitted.
For contracts over $10,000, the Contractor agrees that it does not and will not maintain or provide
for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will
not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where
segregated facilities are maintained. “Segregated facilities,” as used in this clause, means any
waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time
clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains,
recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees,
that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin because of written or oral policies or employee custom. The term
does not include separate or single-user rest rooms or necessary dressing or sleeping areas
provided to assure privacy between the sexes. The Contractor agrees that a breach of this clause
is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract. The Contractor shall include this
clause in every subcontract and purchase order that is subject to the Equal Opportunity clause of
this contract.
Certification by Bidder
Name and Address of Bidder (include zip code)
1. Bidder has participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity
Clause.
Yes
No
2. Compliance reports were required to be filled in connection with such contract or subcontract.
Yes
No
3. Bidder has filed all compliance reports due under applicable instructions, including Monthly
Employment Utilization Report (257)
Yes
No
None Required
4. Have you ever been or are you being considered for sanction due to violation of Executive
Order 11246, as amended?
Yes
No
5. Bidder certifies that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any
segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its
employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are
maintained.
Name and Title of Signer (please type)
Signature
Date
4.
CERTIFICATION OF BIDDER REGARDING SECTION 3
(Sample)
Name of Prime Contractor
Project Name
Project Number
The undersigned hereby certifies that:
a)
Section 3 provisions are included in the Contract.
b)
A Contractor Section 3 Plan was prepared and submitted as part of the bid proceedings (if
bid exceeds $100,000).
Name & Title of Signer (print or type)
Signature
Date
5.
CONTRACTOR SECTION 3 PLAN
(If bid exceeds $100,000)
(Name of Contractor)
agrees to implement the following specific affirmative
action steps directed at increasing the utilization of lower income residents and businesses within the
Town/City/County of
.
A. To ascertain from the locality’s CDBG program official the exact boundaries of the Section 3 covered
project area and where advantageous, seek the assistance of local officials in preparing and
implementing the Section 3 Plan.
B. To attempt to recruit from within the city the necessary number of lower income residents through: Local
advertising media, signs placed at the proposed site for the project, and community organizations and
public or private institutions operating within or serving the project area such as Service Employment
and Redevelopment (SER), Opportunities Industrialization Center (OIC), Urban League, Concentrated
Employment Program, Hometown Plan, or the U.S. Employment Service.
C. To maintain a list of all lower-income residents who have applied either on their own or on referral from
any source, and to employ such persons, if otherwise eligible and if a vacancy exists.
D. To insert this Section 3 plan in all bid documents, and to require all bidders on subcontracts to submit
a Section 3 plan including utilization goals and the specific steps planned to accomplish these goals. *
E. To insure that subcontract which are typically let on a negotiated rather than a bid basis in areas other
than Section 3 covered project areas, are also let on a negotiated basis, whenever feasible, when let
in a Section 3 covered project area. *
F. To formally contact unions, subcontractors and trade associations to secure their cooperation for this
program.
G. To insure that all appropriate project area business concerns are notified of pending subcontractual
opportunities.
H. To maintain records, including copies of correspondence, memoranda, etc., which document that all of
the above affirmative action steps have been taken.
I.
To appoint or recruit an executive official of the company or agency as Equal Opportunity Officer to
coordinate the implementation of this Section 3 plan.
J.
To list on Table A, information related to subcontracts to be awarded.
K. To list on Table B, all projected workforce needs for all phases of this project by occupation, trade, skill
level and number of positions.
* Loans, grants, contracts and subsidies for $100,000 or less are exempt.
As officers and representatives of
(Name of Contractor)
We the undersigned have read and fully agree to this Section 3 Plan, and become a party to the full
implementation of this program.
Signature
Title
Date
Signature
Title
Date
CONTRACTOR SECTION 3 PLAN (continued)
TABLE A
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTS BREAKDOWN
FOR THE PERIOD COVERING
through
(Duration of the CDBG-Assisted Project)
__
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Column 5
TYPE OF
CONTRACT
(BUSINESS OR
PROFESSION)
TOTAL
NUMBER OF
CONTRACTS
TOTAL
APPROXIMATE
DOLLAR AMT.
ESTIMATED NO. OF
CONTRACTS TO
SECTION 3
BUSINESSES*
ESTIMATE
DOLLAR AMT. TO
SECTION 3
BUSINESSES
* A Section 3 business is: one that is owned by Section 3 residents (low and very low income residents of
the project area, public housing residents or persons with disabilities); one that employs Section 3
residents; or one that subcontracts to businesses that provide opportunities for low and very low income
residents.
The Project Area is coextensive with the City/County of
‘s boundaries.
Company
Project Name
Project Number
EEO Officer-Signature
Date
CONTRACTOR SECTION 3 PLAN (continued)
TABLE B
ESTIMATED PROJECT WORKFORCE BREAKDOWN
Column 1
JOB CATEGORY
Column 2
Column 3
Column 4
Column 5
TOTAL
ESTIMATED
POSITIONS
NO. POSITIONS
CURRENTLY
OCCUPIED BY
PERMANENT
EMPLOYEES
NO. POSITIONS
NOT CURRENTLY
OCCUPIED BY
PERMANENT
EMPLOYEES
NO. POSITIONS
TO BE FILLED
WITH SECTION
3 RESIDENTS*
OFFICERS
SUPERVISORS
PROFESSIONALS
TECHNICIANS
HOUSING SALES
RENTAL/MANAGEMENT
OFFICE CLERICAL
SERVICE WORKERS
OTHERS
TRADE:
JOURNEYMEN
HELPERS
APPRENTICES
MAXIMUM NO. TRAINEES
OTHERS
TRADE:
JOURNEYMEN
HELPERS
APPRENTICES
MAXIMUM NO. TRAINEES
OTHERS
TRADE:
JOURNEYMEN
HELPERS
APPRENTICES
MAXIMUM NO. TRAINEES
OTHERS
* Section 3 residents include low and very low income persons who live in the project area, public housing
residents and persons with disabilities.
Company
Project Name
Project Number
EEO Officer-Signature
Date
6.
CERTIFICATION BY PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR
REGARDING EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
CERTIFICATION BY PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR
REGARDING EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
Name of Prime Contractor
Project Number
Instructions
This certification is required pursuant to Executive Order 11246 (30 F.R. 12319-25). The
Implementing rules and regulations provide that any bidder or prospective contractor, or any of
their proposed subcontractors, shall state as an initial part of the bid or negotiations of the contract
whether it has participated in any previous contract or subcontract subject to the equal opportunity
clause, and if so, whether it has filed all compliance reports due under applicable instructions.
Where the certification indicates that the subcontractor has not filed a compliance report due under
applicable instructions, such subcontractor shall be required to submit a compliance report before
the owner approves the subcontract or permits work to begin under the subcontract.
For subcontracts over $10,000, the Subcontractor agrees that it does not and will not maintain or
provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not
and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where
segregated facilities are maintained. “Segregated facilities,” as used in this clause, means any
waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time
clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains,
recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees,
that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin because of written or oral policies or employee custom. The term
does not include separate or single-user rest rooms or necessary dressing or sleeping areas
provided to assure privacy between the sexes. The Subcontractor agrees that a breach of this
clause is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this contract. The Subcontractor shall
include this clause in every subcontract and purchase order that is subject to the Equal Opportunity
clause of this contract.
Subcontractor’s Certification
Name and Address of Subcontractor (include zip code)
1. Subcontractor has participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal
Opportunity Clause.
Yes___
No___
2. Compliance reports were required to be filled in connection with such contract or subcontract.
Yes___
No___
3. Subcontractor has filed all compliance reports due under applicable instructions, including
Monthly Employment Utilization Report (257)
Yes___
No___
None Required___
4. Have you ever been or are you being considered for sanction due to violation of Executive
Order 11246, as amended?
Yes___
No___
5. Bidder certifies that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any
segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its
employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are
maintained.
Name and Title of Signer (please type)
Signature
Date
7.
CERTIFICATION OF PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTOR REGARDING
SECTION 3 (Sample)
Name of Subcontractor
Project Name
Project Number
The undersigned hereby certifies that:
(a)
Section 3 provisions are included in the Contract.
(b)
A written Section 3 plan was prepared and submitted as part of the bid proceedings (if bid
exceeds $100,000).
Name & Title of Signer (print or type)
Signature
Date
8.
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING
LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION CONCERNING
LABOR STANDARDS AND PREVAILING WAGE REQUIREMENTS
TO (Appropriate Recipient):
DATE
C/O
PROJECT NUMBER (if any)
PROJECT NAME
1.
The undersigned, having executed a contract with
construction of the above identified project, acknowledges that:
(a)
(b)
(c)
2.
for
the
The Labor Standards provisions are included in the aforesaid contract;
Prevailing wage requirements are followed, including paying the higher of the Federal or
State wage rate by labor classification.
Correction of any infractions of the aforesaid conditions, including infractions by any of his
subcontractors and any lower tier subcontractors, is his responsibility.
He certifies that:
(a)
Neither he nor any firm, partnership or association in which he has substantial interest is
designated as an ineligible contractor by the Comptroller of the United States pursuant to
Section 5.6(b) of the Regulations of the Secretary of Labor., Part 5 (29 CFR, Part 5) or
pursuant to Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act, as amended (40 U.S. C. 276a-2(a)).
(b)
No part of the aforementioned contract has been or will be subcontracted to any
subcontractor if such subcontractor or any firm, corporation, partnership or association in
which such subcontractor has a substantial interest is designed as an ineligible contractor
pursuant to any of the aforementioned regulatory or statutory provisions.
3.
He agrees to obtain and forward to the aforementioned recipient within ten days after the execution
of any subcontract, including those executed by his subcontractors and any lower tier
subcontractors, a Subcontractor’s Certification Concerning Labor Standards and Prevailing Wage
Requirements executed by the subcontractors.
4.
He certifies that:
(a)
The legal name and the business address of the undersigned are:
(b)
The undersigned is:
(1) A SINGLE PROPRIETORSHIP
(3) A CORPORATION ORGANIZED IN THE
STATE OF:
(2) A PARTNERSHIP
(4) OTHER ORGANIZATION
(Describe)
(c)
The name, title and address of the owner, partners, or officers of the undersigned are:
NAME
(d)
ADDRESS
The names and addresses of all other persons, both natural and corporate, having a
substantial interest in the undersigned, and the nature of the interest are (if none, so
state)
NAME
(e)
TITLE
ADDRESS
NATURE OF INTENT
The names, addresses and trade classifications of all other building construction
contractors in which undersigned ha a substantial interest (if none, so state):
NAME
ADDRESS
TRADE CLASSIFICATION
Date
(Contractor)
By:
WARNING
U.S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U.S. C., provides in part: “Whoever TT makes, passes,
utters, or publishes any statement knowing the same to be falseT.. shall be fined not more than $5,000
or imprisoned not more than two years, or both.”
9.
CONTRACT FORM
THIS AGREEMENT, made this
day of
, Herein called “Owner,”
(Corporate Name of Owner
, 20
, by and between
herein through its
, and
STRIKE OUT (a corporation)
(a partnership)
INAPPLICABLE (an individual doing business as
TERMS
of
, County of
hereinafter called “Contractor”
, and State of
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter
mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the
OWNER to commence and complete the construction as described as follows:
hereinafter called the project, for the sum of
Dollars ($
) and all extra work in
connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General and Special Conditions of the Contract; and
at his (its or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment,
tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the
said project in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal, the General Conditions,
Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions of the Contract, the plans, which include all maps,
plats, blue prints and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, the specifications
and contract documents therefore as prepared by
,herein entitled the Architect/Engineer, and as enumerated in Paragraph 1 of the Supplemental
General Conditions, all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the
contract.
The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work under this contract on or before a date to be
specified in written "Notice to Proceed" of the OWNER and to fully complete the project within
consecutive calendar days thereafter. The Contractor further agrees to pay, as liquidated damages, the
sum of $
for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in
Paragraph 19 of the General Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract,
subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract, and to make
payments on account thereof as provided in Paragraph 25, "Payments to Contractor,” of the General
Conditions.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this contract in six
(6) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first above
mentioned.
(Seal)
ATTEST
(Owner)
By
(Secretary)
(Witness)
(Title)
(Seal)
(Contractor)
By
(Secretary)
(Witness)
(Title)
(Address and Zip Code)
NOTE: Secretary of the Owner should attest. If Contractor is a corporation, Secretary should
attest.
10.
BONDING REQUIREMENTS
Construction project bids estimated to exceed $25,000 must include bidder security. An
acceptable form of bidder security is a bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five percent
of the bid price. The “bid guarantee” shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond,
certified check, or other negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder
will, upon acceptance of his/her bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required
within the time specified.
Construction contracts or subcontracts exceeding $25,000 must include:
a. A performance bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price as it
may be increased. A “performance bond” is one executed in connection with a contract to
secure fulfillment of all the contractor’s obligations under such contract.
b. A payment bond on part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A “payment
bond” is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment as required by law of
all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work provided for in the
contract.
11.
CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY
I, the undersigned,
_______
, the duly authorized and acting legal
representative of
, do hereby certify as
follows:
I have examined the attached contract(s) and surety bonds and the manner of execution thereof,
and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements has been duly executed by the
proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that said
representatives have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the
respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally
binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with terms, conditions and
provisions thereof.
Signature
Date
12.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Contract and Contract Documents
Definitions
Additional Instructions and Details Drawings
Shop or Setting Drawings
Materials, Services and Facilities
Contractor’s Title to Materials
Inspection and Testing of Materials
“Or Equal” Clause
Copyrights and Patents
Surveys, Permits and Regulations
Contractor’s Obligations
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Weather Conditions
Protection of Work and Property- Emergency
Inspection
Reports, Records and Data
Superintendence by Contractor
Changes in Work
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
18.
19.
Extras
Time for Completion and Liquidated
Damages
Correction of Work
Subsurface Conditions Found Different
Claims for Extra Cost
Right of Owner to Terminate Contract
Construction Schedule and Periodic
Estimates
Payments to Contractor
Acceptance of Final Payment Constitutes
Release
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
Payments by Contractor
Insurance
Contract Security
Additional or Substitute Bond
Assignments
Mutual Responsibility of Contractors
Separate Contracts
Subcontracting
Architect/Engineer’s Authority
Stated Allowances
Use of Premises and Removal of
Debris
Quantities of Estimate
Lands and Rights-of-Way
General Guaranty
Conflicting Conditions
Notice and Service Thereof
Provisions Required by Law
Deemed Inserted
Protection of Lives and Health
Subcontracts
Conflict of Interest
Interest of Member of Congress
Other Prohibited Interests
Use Prior to Owner’s Acceptance
Photographs of the Project
Suspension of Work
52.
53.
54.
Access to Records
Federal Labor Standards
Anti Kickback Act
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
13.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Including Federal Labor Standards Provisions
1. Contract and Contractor Documents
The project to be constructed and pursuant to this Contract will be financed with assistance
from the Kentucky Community Development Block Grant Program and is subject to all
applicable Federal laws and regulations.
The plans, specifications and addenda, hereinafter enumerated in Paragraph 1 of the
Supplemental General Conditions on page 30, shall form part of this Contract and the
provisions thereof shall be as binding upon the parties hereto as if they were herein fully set
forth. The table of contents, titles, headings, running headlines and marginal notes contained
herein and in said documents are solely to facilitate reference to various provisions of the
Contract Documents and in no way affect, limit or cast light on the interpretation of the
provisions to which they refer.
2. Definitions
The following terms as used in this contract are respectively defined as follows:
(a) “Contractor”: A person, firm or corporation with whom the contract is made by the
Owner.
(b) “Subcontractor”: A person, firm or corporation supplying labor and materials or only
labor for work at the site of the project for, and under separate contract or agreement
with, the Contractor.
(c) “Work on (at) the project”: Work to be performed at the location of the project, including
the transportation of materials and supplies to or from the location of the project by
employees of the Prime Contractor and any Subcontractor.
3. Additional Instructions and Detail Drawings
The Contractor will be furnished additional instructions and detail drawings as necessary to
carry out the work included in the contract. The additional drawings and instructions thus
supplied to the Contractor will coordinate with the Contract Documents and will be so prepared
that they can be reasonably interpreted as part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the
work in accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions. The Contractor and
the Architect/Engineer will prepare jointly (a) a schedule, fixing the dates at which special
detail drawings will be required, such drawings, if any, to be furnished by the
Architect/Engineer in accordance with said schedule, and (b) a schedule fixing the respective
dates for the submission of show drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and
installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and the completion of the various parts of
the work; each such schedule to be subjected to change from time to time in accordance with
the progress of the work.
4. Shop or Setting Drawings
The Contractor shall submit promptly to the Architect/Engineer two copies of each shop or
setting drawing prepared in accordance with the schedule predetermined as aforesaid. After
examination of such drawings by the Architect/Engineer and the return thereof, the Contractor
shall make such corrections to the drawings as have been indicated and shall furnish the
Architect/Engineer with two corrected copies. If requested by the Architect/Engineer the
Contractor must furnish additional copies. Regardless of corrections made in or approval
given to such drawings by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor will nevertheless be
responsible for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to the plans and
specifications, unless he notifies the Architect/Engineer in writing of any deviations at the time
he furnishes such drawings.
5. Materials, Services and Facilities
(a) It is understood that except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, water,
light, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature
and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute,
complete and deliver the work within the specified time.
(b) Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, on Sunday or Legal
Holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the Owner.
6. Contractor’s Title to Materials
No materials or supplies for the work shall be purchased by the Contractor subject to any
chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest
is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and
supplies used by him in the work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances.
7. Inspection and Testing of Materials
(a) All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be subject
to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards. The
laboratory or inspection agency shall be selected by the Owner. The Owner will
pay for all laboratory inspection service direct, and not as a part of the Subcontract.
(b) Materials of construction, particularly those upon which the strength and durability
of the structure may depend, shall be subject to inspection and testing to establish
conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended.
8. “Or Equal” Clause
Whenever a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the plans or in the
specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade names, catalogue
numbers, etc., it is intended merely to establish a standard; and, any materials, article or
equipment of other manufacturers and vendors which will perform adequately to the duties
imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material,
article or equipment so proposed, is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, of equal
substance and function. It shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the
Architect/Engineer’s written approval.
9. Copyrights and Patents
(a) The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner and its officers, agents, servants
and employees harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including cost and
expenses for, or on account of, any patented or unpatended invention, process,
article or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract,
including its use by the Owner, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the
Contract Documents.
(b) License or Royalty Fees: License and/or royalty fees for the use of a process which
is authorized by the Owner of the project must be reasonable, and paid to the
holder of the patent, or his authorized licensee, direct by the Owner and not by or
through the Contractor.
(c) If the contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letters, patent or
copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the Owner of
such patented or copyrighted design, device or material. If is mutually agreed and
understood, that without exception, the contract prices shall include all royalties or
costs arising from the use of such design, device or materials, in any say involved
in the work. The Contactor and/or his Sureties shall indemnify and save harmless
the Owner of the project from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the
use of such patented or copyrighted design, device or materials or any trademark
or copyright in connection with work agreed to be performed under this Contract,
and shall indemnify the Owner for any cost, expense or damage which it may be
obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution
of the work or after completion of the work.
(d) Any copyrightable work resulting from this Agreement is available to the author for
such, but the City and the Department of Local Government reserve the option for
unlimited use and license to such work. Any discovery or invention shall be
reported promptly to the City and the Department of Local Government for the
determination as to whether patent protection should be sought and how the rights
of any patent shall be disposed of and administered in order to protect the public
interest.
10. Surveys, Permits and Regulations
Unless otherwise expressly provided for in the specifications, the Owner will furnish the
Contractor all surveys necessary for the execution of the work.
The Contractor shall procure and pay all permits, licenses and approvals necessary for the
execution of this Subcontract.
The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, orders and regulations relating
to performance of the work, the protection of adjacent property and the maintenance of
passageways, guard fences or other protective facilities.
11. Contractor’s Obligations
The Contractor shall and will, in good workmanlike manner, do and perform all work and
furnish all supplies and materials, machinery, equipment, facilities and means, except as
herein otherwise expressly specified, necessary or proper to perform and complete all the
work required by this Contract, within the time herein specified, in accordance with the
provisions of this Contract and said specifications and in accordance with the plans and
drawings covered by this Contract any and all supplemental plans and drawings, and in
accordance with the directions of the Contractor and/or Architect/Engineer as given from time
to time during the progress of the work. He shall furnish, erect, maintain and remove such
construction plant and such temporary works as may be required.
The Contractor shall observe, comply with, and be subject to all terms, conditions,
requirements and limitations of the Contract and specifications, and shall do, carry on and
complete the entire work to the satisfaction of the Contractor, Architect/Engineer and the
Owner.
12. Weather Conditions
In the event of temporary suspension of work, or during inclement weather, or whenever the
Architect/Engineer shall direct, the Contractor will, and will cause his Subcontractors to protect
carefully his and their work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the
opinion of the Architect/Engineer, any work or materials shall have been damaged or injured
by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors to protect his
work, such materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
13. Protection of Work and Property – Emergency
The Contractor shall at all times safely guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in
connection with this Contract. He shall at all times safely guard and protect his own work, and
that of adjacent property from damage. The Contractor shall replace or make good any such
damage, loss or injury unless such be caused directly by errors contained in the Contract or
by the Owner, or his duly authorized representatives.
In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury of property, and/or safety of life, the
Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Architect/Engineer, in
a diligent manner. He shall notify the Architect/Engineer immediately thereafter. Any claim for
compensation by the Contractor due to such extra work shall be promptly submitted to the
Architect/Engineer for approval.
Where the Contractor has not taken action but has notified the Architect/Engineer of an
emergency threatening injury to persons or damage to the work or any adjoining property, he
shall act as instructed or authorized by the Architect/Engineer.
The amount of reimbursement claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency action
shall be determined in the manner provided in Paragraph 17 of the General Conditions.
14. Inspection
The authorized representatives and agents of the Department of Local Government and the
Department of Housing and Urban Development shall be permitted to inspect all work,
materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials and other relevant data and
records.
15. Reports, Records and Data
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs, progress
schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and other data as the Owner may request
concerning work performed or to be performed under this Contract.
16. Superintendence by Contractor
At the site of the work the Contractor shall employ a construction superintendent or foreman
who shall have full authority to act for the Contractor. It is understood that such representative
shall be acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and shall be one who can be continued in that
capacity for the particular job involved unless he ceases to be on the Contractor’s payroll.
17. Changes in Work
No changes in the work covered by the approved Contract Documents shall be made without
having prior written approval of the Owner. Charges or credits for the work covered by the
approved change shall be determined by one or more, or a combination of the following
methods:
(a) Unit bid prices previously approved.
(b) An agreed lump sum.
(c) The actual cost of
1. Labor, including foremen.
2. Materials entering permanently into the work.
3. The ownership or rental cost of construction plant and equipment
during the time of use on the extra work.
4. Power and consumable supplies for the operation of power
equipment.
5. Insurance.
6. Social Security and old age and unemployment contributions.
18. Extras
Without invalidating the Contract, the Owner may order extra work or make changes by
altering, adding to or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted accordingly,
and the consent of the Surety being first obtained where necessary or desirable. All the work
of the kind bid upon shall be paid for at the price stipulated in the proposal, and no claims for
any extra work or materials shall be allowed unless the work is ordered in writing by the Owner
or its Architect/Engineer, acting officially for the Owner, and the price is stated in such order.
19. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner,
that the date of beginning and the time for completion as specified in the contract of the work
to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract; and it is further mutually
understood and agreed that the work embraced in this Contract shall be commended on a
data to be specified in the “Notice to Proceed”.
The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and
uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time
specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the
Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for
the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual
industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein
specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does
hereby agree, as part consideration for the awarding of this Contract, to pay to the Owner the
amount specified in the Contract, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach
of contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall
be in default after the time stipulated in the Contractor for completing the work.
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner
because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual
damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is agreed to be the amount
of damages which the Owner would sustain and said amount shall be retained from time to
time by the Owner from current periodical estimates.
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract and
of the specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance
of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract an additional time is allowed for the
completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of
this Contract. Provided, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or
any excess cost when the Owner determines that the contractor is without fault and the
Contractor’s reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner; provided, further,
that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the
delay in completion of the work is due:
(a) To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government.
(b) To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without fault or negligence of the
Contractor, including, but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy,
acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in performance of a contract with the
Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes
and severe weather.
(c) To any delays of Subcontractors or suppliers occasioned by any of the causes
specified in subsections (a) and (b) of this article.
Provided, further, that the Contractor shall, within ten (10) days from the beginning of such
delay, unless the Owner shall grant a further period of time prior to the date of final settlement
of the Contract, notify the Owner, in writing, of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain in
the facts and extent of the delay and notify the Contractor within a reasonable time of its
decision in the matter.
20. Correction of Work
All work, all materials, whether incorporated in the work or not, all processes of manufacture,
and all methods of construction shall be at all times and places subject to the inspection of
the Architect/Engineer who shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the work,
materials, processes of manufacture and methods of construction for the purposes for which
they are used. Should they fail to meet his approval they shall be forthwith reconstructed,
made good, replaced and/or corrected, as the case may be, by the Contractor at his own
expense. Rejected materials shall immediately be removed from the site. If, in the opinion of
the Architect/Engineer, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to
reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder shall be
reduced by such amount as in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer shall be equitable.
21. Subsurface Conditions Found Different
Should the Subcontractor encounter subsurface and/or latent conditions at the site materially
differing from those shown on the plans or indicated in the specifications, he shall immediately
give notice to the Architect/Engineer of such conditions before they are disturbed. The
Architect/Engineer will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions, and if he finds that they
materially differ from those shown on the plans or indicated in the specifications he will at once
make such changes in the plans and/or specifications as he may find necessary, any increase
or decrease of cost resulting from such changes to be adjusted in the manner provided in
Paragraph 17 of the General Conditions.
22. Claims for Extra Cost
No claim for extra work or associated cost shall be allowed unless the same was done in
pursuance of a written order of the Architect/Engineer approved by the Owner, as aforesaid
and the claim presented with the first estimate after the changed or extra work is done. When
work is performed under the terms of subparagraph 17(c) of the General Conditions, the
Subcontractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering all items of cost
and when requested by the Owner, give the Owner access to accounts relating thereto.
23. Right of Owner to Terminate Contract
In the event that any of the provisions of this Contract are violated by the Contractor, or by
any of his Subcontractors, the Owner may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the
Surety of its intention to terminate the Contract, such notices to contain the reasons for such
intention to terminate the Contract, and unless within ten (10) days after the serving of such
notice upon the Contractor, such violation or delay shall cease and satisfactory arrangement
of correction be made, the Contract shall, upon the expiration of said ten (10) days, cease and
terminate. In the event of any such termination, the Owner shall immediately serve notice
thereof upon the Surety and the Contractor and the Surety shall have the right to take over
and perform the Contract; provided, however, that if the Surety does not commence
performance thereof within ten (10) days from the date of the mailing to such Surety of notice
of termination, the Owner may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion by
contract or by force account for the account and at the expense of the Contractor and the
Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for any excess cost occasioned by the
Owner thereby, and in such event the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing
the work, such materials, appliances and plant as may be on the site of the work and
necessary therefore.
The Owner may terminate this Contract at any time by giving at least ten (10) days notice in
writing to the Contractor. If the Contract is terminated by the Owner as provided herein, the
Contractor will be paid for the time provided and expenses incurred up to the termination date.
If the Contract is terminated due to the fault of the Contractor, the above paragraph relative
to termination shall apply.
24. Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates
Immediately after execution and delivery of the Contract, and before the first partial payment
is made, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner an estimated construction progress
schedule in form satisfactory to the Owner, showing the proposed dates of commencement
and completion of each of the various subdivisions of work required under the Contract
Documents and the anticipated amount of each monthly payment will become due the
Contractor in accordance with the progress schedule. The Contractor shall also furnish on
forms to be supplied by the Owner (a) a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the
contract price and (b) periodic itemized estimates of work done for the purpose of making
partial payments thereon. The costs employed in making up any of these schedules will be
used only for determining the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a
basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price.
25. Payments to the Contractor
(a) Not later than the
day of each calendar month the Owner shall make a
progress payment to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate
of the work performed during the preceding calendar month under this Contract, but to
insure the proper performance of this Contract, the Owner shall retain ten percent (10%)
of the amount of each estimate until final completion and acceptance of all work covered
by this Contract; provided, that the Contractor shall submit his estimate not later than the
_______ day of the month; provided, further, that on completion and acceptance of each
separate building, public work, or other division of the Contract, on which the price is stated
separately in the Contract, payment may be made in full, including retained percentages
thereon, less authorized deductions.
(b) In preparing estimates the material delivered on the site and preparatory work done may
be taken into consideration.
(c) All material and work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the sole
property of the Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor
from the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work upon which
payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work, or as a waiver of the
right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the Contract.
(d) Owner's Right to Withhold Certain Amounts and Make Application Thereof: The
Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims
growing out of the lawful demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen. mechanics,
materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools and
all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this
Contract. The Contractor shall, at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that
all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written
notice on the said Contractor, either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written
notice, direct, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money
deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory
evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to
the Contractor shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no
event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon
the Owner to either the Contractor or his Surety .In paying any unpaid bills of the
Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of the Contractor, and any payment so
made by the Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract by the
Owner to the Contractor and the Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any such
payments made in good faith.
26. Acceptance of Final Payment Constitutes Release
The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to
the Owner of all claims and all liability to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in
connection with this work and for every act and neglect of the Owner and others relating to or
arising out of this work. No payment, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to release the
Contractor or his Sureties from any obligations under this Contract or the performance and
payment bond.
27. Payments by Contractor
The Contractor shall pay (a) for all transportation and utility services not later than the
day of the calendar month following that in which services are rendered, (b) for all
materials, tools and other expendable equipment to the extent of ninety percent (90%) of the
cost thereof, not later than the
day of the calendar month following that in which such
materials, tools and equipment are delivered at the site of the project, and the balance of the
cost thereof, not later than the day following the completion of that part of the work in or on
which such materials, tools and equipment are incorporated or used, and (c) to each of his
Subcontractors, not later than the
day following each payment to the Contractor, the
respective amount allowed the Contractor on account of the work performed by his
Subcontractors to the extent of each Subcontractor’s interest therein.
28. Insurance
The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all the
insurance required under this paragraph and such insurance has been approved by the
Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work on this
subcontract until the insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and
approved.
(a) Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain during
the life of this Contract Workmen's Compensation Insurance as required by
applicable State or territorial law for all of his employees to be engaged in work at
the site of the project under this Contract, and, in case of any such work sublet,
the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Compensation Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in such
work unless such employees are covered by the protection afforded by the
Contractor's Workmen's Compensation Insurance. In case any class of employees
engaged in hazardous work on the project under this Contract is not protected
under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide and
shall cause each Subcontractor to provide adequate employer's liability insurance
for the protection of such of his employees as are not otherwise protected.
Contractor’s Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle Liability
Insurance: The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the life of this
Contract Contractor’s Public Liability Insurance, Contractor’s Property Damage
Insurance and Vehicle Liability Insurance in the amounts specified in Supplemental
General Conditions.
Subcontractor’s Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle
Liability Insurance:
The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his
Subcontractors to procure and to maintain during the life of his subcontract
Subcontractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance and Vehicle
Liability Insurance of the type and in the amounts specified in the Supplemental
General Conditions specified in subparagraph (B) hereof, or (2) insure the activities
of his policy, specified in subparagraph (b) hereof.
Scope of Insurance and Special Hazards: The insurance required under
subparagraphs (b) and (c) hereof shall provide adequate protection for the
Contractor and his Subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which
may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by the
insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him and, also against any
of the special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of this
Contract as enumerated in the Supplemental General Conditions.
Builder’s Risk Insurance (Fire and Extended Coverage): Until the project is
completed and accepted by the Owner, the Owner or Contractor (at the Owner's
option as indicated in the Supplemental General Conditions. Form HUD-4238-N)
is required to maintain Builder's Risk Insurance (fire and extended coverage) on a
100 percent completed value basis on the insurable portion of the project for the
benefit of the Owner, the Contractor, and Subcontractors as their interests may
appear. The Contractor shall not include any costs for Builder's Risk Insurance
(fire and extended coverage) premiums during construction unless the Contractor
is required to provide such insurance, however, this provision shall not release the
Contractor from his obligation to complete, according to plans and specifications,
the project covered by the Contract, and the Contractor and his Surety shall be
obligated to full performance of the Contractor’s undertaking.
Proof of Carriage of Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with
certificates showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates
and date of expiration of policies. Such certificates shall also contain substantially
the following statement: "The insurance covered by this certificate will not be
canceled or materially altered, except after ten (10) days written notice has been
received by the Owner.”
29. Contract Security
The Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred
percent (100%) of the contract prices as security for the faithful performance of this Contract
and also a payment bond in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
contract price or in a penal sum not less than that prescribed by State, territorial or local law,
as security for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract
and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. The performance bond and the
payment bond may be in one or in separate instruments in accordance with local law.
30. Additional or Substitute Bond
If at any time the Owner for justifiable cause shall be or become dissatisfied with any Surety
or Sureties, then upon the performance or payment bonds, the Contractor shall within five (5)
days after notice from the Owner to do so, substitute an acceptable bond (or bonds) in such
form and sum and signed by such other Surety or Sureties as may be satisfactory to the
Owner. The premiums on such bond shall be paid by the Contractor. No further payments
shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new Surety or Sureties shall have furnished
such an acceptable bond to the Owner.
31. Assignments
The Contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of this Contract or any moneys due or
to become due hereunder without written consent of the Owner. In case the Contractor
assigns all or any part of any moneys due or to become due under this Contract, the
instrument of assignment shall contain a clause substantially to the effect that it is agreed that
the right of the assignee in and to any moneys due or to become due to the corporations of
services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in this
contract.
32. Mutual Responsibility of Contracts
If, through acts of neglect on the part of the Contractor, any other Contractor or any
Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, the Contractor agrees to settle with
such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor
or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim
against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner
shall notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any
such claim.
33. Separate Contracts
The Contractor shall coordinate his operations with those of other Contractors. Cooperation
will be required in the arrangement for the storage of materials and in the detailed execution
of the work. The Contractor, including his Subcontractors, shall keep informed of the progress
and the detail work of other Contractors and shall notify the Architect/Engineer immediately of
lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other Contractors. Failure of a
Contractor to keep informed of the work progressing on the site and failure to give notice of
lack of progress of defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by him
of the status of the work as being satisfactory for proper coordination with his own work.
34. Subcontracting
(a) The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty Subcontractors on those parts
of the work which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty
Subcontractors.
(b) The Contractor shall not award any work to any Subcontractor without prior written
approval of the Owner, which approval will not be given until the Contractor
submits to the Owner a written statement concerning the proposed award to the
Subcontractor, which statement shall contain such information as the Owner may
require.
(c) The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and
omissions of his Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly
employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly
employed by him.
(d) The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all
subcontracts relative to the work to bind Subcontractors to the Contractor by the
terms of the General Conditions and other Contract Documents insofar as
applicable to the work of Subcontractors and to give the Contractor the same
power as regards terminating any subcontract that the Owner may exercise over
the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents.
(e) Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation between
any Subcontractor and the Owner.
35. Architect/Engineer’s Authority
The Architect/Engineer shall give all orders and directions contemplated under this contract
and specifications, relative to the execution of the work. The Architect/Engineer shall
determine the amount, quality, acceptability and fitness of the several kinds of work and
materials which are to be paid for under this Contract and shall decide all questions which
may arise in relation to said work and the construction thereof. The Architect/Engineer's
estimates and decisions shall be final and conclusive, except as herein otherwise expressly
provided. In case any question shall arise between the parties hereto relative to said Contract
and specifications, the determination or decision of the Architect/Engineer shall be a condition
precedent to the right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for work under this
Contract affected in any manner or to any extent by such question.
The Architect/Engineer shall decide the meaning and intent of any portion of the
specifications and of any plans or drawings where the same may be found obscure or be in
dispute. Any differences or conflicts in regard to their work which may arise between the
Contractor under this Contract and other Contractors performing work for the Owner shall be
adjusted and determined by the Architect/Engineer.
36. Stated Allowances
The Contractor shall include in his proposal the cash allowances stated in the Supplemental
General Conditions. The Contractor shall purchase the" Allowed Materials" as directed by
the Owner on the basis of the lowest and best bid of at least three competitive bids. If the
actual price for purchasing the "Allowed Materials" is more or less than the “Cash Allowance,"
the contract price shall be adjusted accordingly. The adjustment in contract price shall be
made on the basis of the purchase price without additional charges for overhead, profit,
insurance or any other incidental expenses. The cost of installation of the "Allowed Materials"
shall be included in the applicable sections of the Contract Specifications covering this work.
37. Use of Premises and Removal of Debris
The Contractor expressly undertakes at his own expense:
(a) To take every precaution against injuries to persons or damage to property.
(b) To store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion
at the site of the work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his work or
the work of any other Contractors.
(c) To place upon the work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with
the safety of that portion of the work.
(d) To clean up frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by
his operations, to the end that at all times the site of the work shall present a neat,
orderly and workmanlike appearance.
(e) Before final payment to remove all surplus material, false-work, temporary
structures, including foundations thereof, plant of any description and debris of
every nature resulting from his operations, and to put the site in a neat, orderly
condition.
(f) To effect all cutting, fitting or patching of his work required to make the same to
conform to the plans and specifications and, except with the consent of the
Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter the work of any other Contractor.
38. Quantities of Estimate
Wherever the estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under
this Contract are shown in any of the documents including the proposal, they are given for
use in comparing bids and the right is especially reserved except as herein otherwise
specifically limited, to increase or diminish them as may be deemed reasonably necessary
or desirable by the Owner to complete the work contemplated by this Contract, and such
increase or diminution shall in no way vitiate this Contract, nor shall any such increase or
diminution give cause for claims or liability for damages.
39. Lands and Rights-of-Way
Prior to the start of construction, the Owner shall obtain lands and rights-of-way necessary
for the carrying out and completion of work to be performed under this Contract.
40. General Guaranty
Neither the final certificate of payment nor any provision in the Contract Documents, nor
partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of
work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor of liability
in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship.
The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one year from the date of final
acceptance of the work unless a longer period is specified. The Owner will give notice of
observed defects with reasonable promptness.
41. Conflicting Conditions
Any provisions in any of the Contract Documents which may be in conflict or inconsistent with
any of the paragraphs in these General Conditions shall be void to the extent of such conflict
or inconsistency.
42. Notice and Service Thereof
Any notice to any Contractor from the Owner relative to any part of this Contract shall be in
writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when said notice is
posted, by certified or registered mail, to the said Contractor at his last given address or
delivered in person to the said Contractor or his authorized representative on the work.
43. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted
Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract
shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though
it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted,
or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall
forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
44. Protection of Lives and Health
"The Contractor shall exercise proper precaution at all times for the protection of persons and
property and shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property, either on or off the
site, which occur as a result of his prosecution of the work. The safety provisions of applicable
laws and building and construction codes, in addition to specific safety and health regulations
described by Chapter XIII, Bureau of Labor Standards, Department of Labor, Part 1518,
Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, as outlined in the Federal Register, Volume
36, No.75, Saturday, April 17, 1971. Title 29 - Labor shall be observed and the Contractor
shall take or cause to be taken, such additional safety and health measures as the
Contracting Authority may determine to be reasonably necessary.”
45. Subcontracts
"The Contractor will insert in any subcontracts the Federal Labor Standards Provision
contained herein and such other clauses as the Department of Housing and Urban
Development may, by instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to
include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts which they may enter into, together with
a clause requiring this insertion in any further subcontracts that may in turn be made.”
46. Conflict of Interest
No person who is an employee, agent, consultant, officer or elected or appointed official of
recipient or subrecipient who exercises or has exercised any functions or responsibilities with
respect to KCDBG activities or who is in a position to participate in a decision making process
or gain inside information with regard to such activities may obtain a financial interest or
benefit from a KCDBG activity, have an interest or benefit from the activity or have an interest
in any contract, subcontract or agreement with respect to a CDBG activity or its proceeds, for
themselves or those with whom they have family or business ties. The prohibition applies
during their tenure and for one year thereafter.
47. Interest of Member of or Delegate to Congress
No member of or delegate to Congress or Resident Commissioner shall be admitted to any
share or part of this Contract or to any benefit that may arise therefrom, but this provision
shall not be construed to extend to this Contract if made with a corporation for its general
benefit.
48. Other Prohibited Interests
No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to
negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting or
approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract
or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the project, shall become directly or
indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof. No officer, employee,
architect, attorney, engineer or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such
capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory or
other similar functions in connection with the construction of the project, shall become directly
or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply
contract, subcontract, insurance contract or any other contract pertaining to the project.
49. Use and Occupancy Prior to Acceptance by Owner
The Contractor agrees to use and occupancy of a portion or unit of the project before formal
acceptance by the Owner, provided the Owner:
(a) Secures written consent of the Contractor except in the event, in the opinion of
the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor is chargeable with unwarranted delay in
final cleanup of punch list items or other Contract requirements.
(b) Secures endorsement from the insurance carrier and consent of the surety
permitting occupancy of the building or use of the project during the remaining
period of construction.
Or
(c) When the project consists of more than one building, and one of the buildings is
occupied, secures permanent fire and extended coverage insurance, including a
permit to complete construction. Consent of Surety must also be obtained.
50. Photographs of the Project
If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish photographs of the project, in the
quantities and as described in the Supplemental General Conditions.
51. Suspension of Work
Should the Owner be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with work either before or after
the start of construction by reason of any litigation or other reason beyond the control of the
Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to make or assert claim for damage by reason of
said delay; but time for completion of the work will be extended to such reasonable time as
the Owner may determine will compensate for time lost by such delay with such determination
to be set forth in writing.
52. Access to Records
The Contractor shall maintain accounts and project records, including personnel, property and
financial records, adequate to identify and account for all costs pertaining to the Contract and
such other records as may be deemed necessary by the City/County to assure proper
accounting for all project funds, both CDBG and non-CDBG shares. These records will be
made available to the City, the Department of Local Government, Commonwealth of Kentucky
Finance & Administration Cabinet, Commonwealth of Kentucky Auditor of Public Audits,
Commonwealth of Kentucky Legislative Research Commission, U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development, the U. S. Department of Labor, and the Comptroller General of the
United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives. These parties shall have access
to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent
to the project, for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. All
records shall be maintained for five years after project closeout.
53. Federal Labor Standards Provisions (HUD-401 0,2-84)
Applicability
The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by this contract pertains is
being assisted by the United States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards
Provisions are included in this Contract pursuant to the provisions applicable to such Federal
assistance.
A.1. (i) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of
the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949
in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less
often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except
such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor
under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe
benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than
those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto
and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to
exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs
reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1 (b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon
Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or
mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made
or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans,
funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively
made or incurred during such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on
the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill,
except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more
than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for
the time actually worked therein: provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set
forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination
(including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Part
5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321 shall be posted at all times by the
contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place
where it can easily be seen by the workers.
(ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination
and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the
wage determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe
benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:
1. The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a
classification in the wage determination;
2. The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and
3. The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a
reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.
(b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the
classification (if known), or their representatives, and HUD or its designee agree on the
classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where
appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee to the
Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.
S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized
representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action
within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify HUD or its
designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the
Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
(c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the
classification or their representatives, and HUD or its designee do not agree on the
proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits,
where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of
all interested parties and the recommendation of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator
for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a
determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will notify
HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved
by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
(d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to
subparagraphs (1)(b) or (c) of the paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work
in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the
classification.
(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or
mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall
either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe
benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the
contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs
reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided,
that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the
applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require
the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the
plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number
1215-0140.)
2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an
authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the
contractor under this contract or any other Federal Contract with the same prime contractor, or
any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements,
which is held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or advances as
may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and
helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by
the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice,
trainee or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing
Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project),
all or part of the wages required by the contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to
the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the
suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have
ceased. HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts
withheld for and on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to
whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of direct
Davis-Bacon Act contracts.
3.
(i) Payrolls and Basic Records. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be
maintained by the contractor during the course of the work preserved for a period of three
years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under
the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction
or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address and social
security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of
wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe
benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b)(B) of the DavisBacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages
paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the
wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated
in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1 (b)(2)(B) of DavisBacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to
provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible,
and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or
mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost
incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under
approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of the apprentices
and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.
(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under 0MB Control Numbers 12150140 and 1215-0017.)
(ii)
(a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is
performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but
if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor,
or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted
shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29
CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents
(Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all
subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under 0MB Control Number
1215-0149.)
(b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a 'Statement of Compliance,"
signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment
of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:
1. That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required
to be maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i) and that such
information is correct and complete;
2. That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper 1 apprentice, and
trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been
paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or
indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or
indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions
as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3.
3. That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the
applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the
classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage
determination incorporated into the contract.
(c) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the
reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the
“Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph A.3(ii)(b) of this section.
(d) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or
subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section
231 and Title 31 of the United States Code.
(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph
A.3(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized
representatives of HUD or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such
representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or
subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, HUD or its designee
may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may
be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds.
Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records
available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant 20 CFR Part 5.12.
4. (i) Apprentices and Trainees. Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than
the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U. S.
Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and
Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is
employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an
apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been
certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency
(where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The
allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not
be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the
registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate wage rate, who
is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the
applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually
performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio
permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate
on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing
construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the
ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in
the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice
must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's
level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the
applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with
the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify
fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage
determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different
practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in
accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training,
or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an
apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at
less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable
program is approved.
(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less
than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal
certification by the U. S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The
ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the
plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at
not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress,
expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage
determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the
trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be
paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the
Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship
program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination
which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the
payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by
the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage
rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In addition, any trainee
performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program
shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work
actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws
approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at
less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable
program is approved.
(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen
under this part shall be in conformity with equal employment opportunity requirements of
Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The contractor shall comply with the
requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are incorporated by reference in this contract.
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in any subcontracts the clause
contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as HUD or its designee
may be appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to
include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible
for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract
clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5.
7. Contract Termination; Debarment. A breach of contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be
grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and subcontractor
as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations
of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1,3, and 5 are herein
incorporated by reference in this contract.
9. Disputes Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions
of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes of this contract. Such disputes shall
be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR
Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the
contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U. S. Department of
Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
10. (i) Certification of Eligibility .By entering into this contract, the contractor certified that neither
it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person
or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section 3(a) of the DavisBacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1 ) or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD
programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24.
(ii) No pan of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of
a Government contract by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis- Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1)
or to be awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR Part 24.
(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18
U.S.C.1001. Additionally, U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U.S.C., "Federal
Housing Administration transactions," provides in part: "Whoever, for the purpose of
...influencing in any way the action of such Administration ...makes, utters, or publishes any
statement, knowing the same to be false ...shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned
not more than two years, or both.”
11. Complaints, Proceedings, or Testimony by Employees.
(a) No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary, or other labor standards provisions
of this Contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner
discriminated against by the Contractor or subcontractor because such employee has
filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has
testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards
applicable under Contract to his employer.
B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (over $100,000). As used in this
paragraph, the terms "laborers' and "mechanics" include watchmen and guards.
1. Overtime Requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for
any part of the contract work which may require or involve the
employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such
laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed
on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless
such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than
one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in
excess of forty hours in such workweek.
2. Violation; Liability For Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages. In the
event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this
paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore
shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and
subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work
done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such
District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated
damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or
mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the
clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, in the sum of
$10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or
permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours
without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth
in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph.
3. Withholding For Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. HUD or its
designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an
authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause
to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed
by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other
Federal contract with the same prime contract, or any other Federallyassisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor such sums
as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such
contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages
as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (2) of this
paragraph.
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any
subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through (4) of
this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include
these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall
be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier
subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs (1) through
(4) of this paragraph.
C. Health and Safety
(1) No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under
working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his
health and safety as determined under construction safety and health
standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation.
(2) The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the Secretary
of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 (formerly Part 1518) and failure
to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91-54, 83 Stat. 96).
(3) The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in every
subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each
subcontractor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any
subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the
Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions.
54. Anti-Kickback Act
Attachment to Federal Labor Standards Provisions, So-Called "Anti-Kickback Act" and
Regulations Promulgated Pursuant Thereto by the Secretary of Labor. United States
Department of Labor. Title 18, U.S.C., Section 874 (HUD-4010, 2-76) (Replaces section 1 of
the Act of June 13, 1934 (48 Stat. 948, 40 U.S.C., Section 276B) pursuant to the Act of June
25, 1948, 62 Stat. 862).
Kickbacks from Public Works Employees
Whoever, by force, intimidation, or threat of procuring dismissal from employment, or by any
other manner whatsoever induces any person employed in the construction, prosecution,
completion or repair of any public building, public work, or building or work financed in whole
or in part by loans or grants from the United States, to give up any part of the compensation
to which he is entitled under his contract of employment, shall be fined not more than $5,000
or imprisoned not more than five years, or both.
Section 2 of the Act of June 13, 1934, as amended (48 Stat. 948, 62 Stat. 862,63 Stat. 108,
Stat. 967, 40 U.S.C., section 276c).
The Secretary of Labor shall make reasonable regulations for contractors and subcontractors
engaged in the construction, prosecution, completion or repair of buildings, public works or
buildings or works financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States,
including a provision that each contractor shall furnish weekly a statement with respect to the
wages paid each employee during the preceding week. Section 1001 of Title 18 (United States
Code) shall apply to such statements.
Pursuant to the aforesaid Anti-Kickback Act, the Secretary of Labor, United States
Department of Labor, has promulgated the regulations hereinafter set forth, which regulations
are found in Title 29, Subtitle A, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 3. The term “this part”, as
used in the regulations hereinafter set forth, refers to Part 3 last above mentioned. Said
regulations are as follows.
Title 29 – Labor; Subtitle A – Office of the Secretary of Labor, Part 3 – Contractors and
Subcontractors on Public Building or Public Work Financed in Whole or in part by loans or
grants from the United States.
Section 3.1 – Purpose and scope
This part prescribes "anti-kickback" regulations under section 2 of the Act of June 13, 1934,
as amended (40 U.S.C. 276c), popularly known as the Copeland Act. This part applies to any
contract which is subject to Federal wage standards and which is for the construction,
prosecution, completion, or repair of public buildings, public works or buildings or works
financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States. The part is intended to
aid in the enforcement of the minimum wage provisions of the Davis-Bacon Act and the
various statutes dealing with Federally- assisted construction that contain similar minimum
wage provisions, including those provisions which are not subject to Reorganization Plan
No.14 (e.g., the College Housing Act of 1950, the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, and
the Housing Act of 1959), and in the enforcement of the overtime provisions of the Contract
Work Hours Standards Act whenever they are applicable to construction work. The part details
the obligation of contractors and subcontractors relative to the weekly submission of
statements regarding the wages paid on work covered thereby; sets forth the circumstances
and procedures governing the making of payroll deductions from the wages of those employed
on such work; and delineates the methods of payment permissible on such work.
Section 3.2 – Definitions.
As used in the regulations in this part:
(a) The terms "building" or "work" generally include construction activity as distinguished
from manufacturing, furnishing of materials, or servicing and maintenance work. The
terms include, without limitation, buildings, structures, and improvements of all types,
such as bridges, dams, plants, highways, parkways, streets, subways, tunnels,
sewers, mains, power lines, pumping stations, railways, airports, terminals, docks,
piers, wharves, ways, lighthouses, buoys, jetties, breakwaters, levees, and canals;
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
dredging, shoring, scaffolding, drilling, blasting, excavating, clearing, and landscaping.
Unless conducted in connection with and at the site of such a building or work as is
described in the foregoing sentence, the manufacture or furnishing of materials,
articles, supplies, or equipment (whether or not a Federal or State agency acquires
title to such materials, articles, supplies, or equipment during the course of the
manufacture or furnishing, or owns the materials from which they are manufactured or
furnished) is not a "building" or “work” within the meaning of the regulations in this part.
The terms "construction", "completion," or "repair' mean all types of work done on a
particular building or work at the site thereof, including, without limitation, altering,
remodeling, painting and decorating, the transporting of materials and supplies to or
from the building or work by the employees of the construction contractor or
construction subcontractor, and the manufacturing or furnishing of materials, articles,
supplies, or equipment on the site of the building or work, by persons employed at the
site by the contractor or subcontractor.
The terms "public building" or "public work" include building or work for whose
construction, prosecution, completion, or repair, as defined above, a Federal agency
is a contracting party, regardless of whether title thereof is in a Federal agency.
The term "building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the
United States" includes building or work for whose construction, prosecution,
completion, or repair, as defined above, payment or part payment is made directly or
indirectly from funds provided by loans or grants by a Federal agency. The term does
not include building or work for which Federal assistance is limited solely to loan
guarantees or insurance.
Every person paid by a contractor or subcontractor in any manner for his labor in the
construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of a public building or public work or
work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States is
"employed" and receiving "wages," regardless of contractual relationship alleged to
exist between him and the real employer.
The term "any affiliated person" includes a spouse, child, parent, or other close relative
of the contractor or subcontractor; a partner or officer of the contractor or
subcontractor; a corporation closely connected with the contractor or subcontractor as
parent, subsidiary or otherwise, and an officer or agent of such corporation.
The term "Federal agency" means the United States, the District of Columbia, and all
executive departments, independent establishments, administrative agencies, and
instrumentalities of the United States and of the District of Columbia, including
corporations. all or substantially all of the stock of which is beneficially owned by the
United States, by the District of Columbia, or any of the foregoing departments,
establishments, agencies and instrumentalities.
Section 3.3 – Weekly statement with respect to payment of wages
(a) As used in this section, the term "employee" shall not apply to persons in
classifications higher than that of laborer or mechanic and those who are the
immediate supervisors of such employees.
(b) Each contractor or subcontractor engaged in the construction, prosecution,
completion, or repair of any public building or public work, or building or work financed
in whole or in part by loans or grants from the United States, shall furnish each week
a statement with respect to the wages paid each of its employees engaged on work
covered by 29 CFR Parts 3 and 5 during the preceding weekly payroll period. This
statement shall be executed by the contractor or subcontractor or by an authorized
officer or employee of the contractor or subcontractor who supervises the payment of
wages and shall be on form WH 348, "Statement of Compliance," or on an identical
form on the back of WH 347, "Payroll (For Contractors Optional Use)" or on any form
with identical wording. Sample copies of WH 347 and WH 348 may be obtained from
the Government contracting or sponsoring agency, and copies of these forms may be
purchased at the Government Printing Office.
(c) The requirements of this section shall not apply to any contract of $2,000 or less.
(d) Upon a written finding by the head of a Federal agency, the Secretary of Labor may
provide reasonable limitations, variations, tolerances and exemptions from the
requirements of this section subject to such conditions as the Secretary of Labor may
specify.
(29 F.R. 95, Jan. 4 1964, as amended at 33 FR 10186, July 17, 1968)
Section 3.4 – Submission of weekly statements and the preservation and inspection of weekly
payroll records.
(a) Each weekly statement required under SS 3.3 shall be delivered by the contractor or
subcontractor within seven days after the regular payment date of the payroll period,
to a representative of a Federal or State agency in charge at the site of the building or
work, or, if there is no representative of a Federal or State agency at the site of the
building or work, the statement shall be mailed by the contractor or subcontractor,
within such time, to a Federal or State agency contracting for or financing the building
or work. After such examination and check as may be made, such statement, or a
copy thereof, shall be kept available, or shall be transmitted together with a report of
any violation, in accordance with applicable procedures prescribed by the United
States Department of Labor.
(b) Each contractor or subcontractor shall preserve his weekly payroll records for a period
of three years from date of completion of the contract. The payroll records shall set out
accurately and completely the name and address of each laborer and mechanic, his
correct classification, rate of pay, daily and weekly number of hours worked,
deductions made, and actual wages paid. Such payroll records shall be made
available at all times for inspection by the contracting officer or his authorized
representative, and by authorized representatives of the Department of Labor.
Section 3.5 – Payroll deductions permissible without application to or approval of the Secretary
of Labor.
Deductions made under the circumstances or in the situations described in the paragraphs of this
section may be made without application to and approval of the Secretary of Labor.
(a) Any deduction made in compliance with the requirements of Federal, State or local
law, such as Federal or State withholding income taxes and Federal social security
taxes.
(b) Any deduction of sums previously paid to the employee as a bona fide prepayment of
wages when such prepayment is made without discount or interest. A "bona fide
prepayment of wages'. is considered to have been made only when cash or its
equivalent has been advanced to the person employed in such manner as to give him
complete freedom of disposition of the advanced funds.
(c) Any deduction of amounts required by court process to be paid to another, unless the
deduction is in favor of the contractor, subcontractor or any affiliated person, or when
collusion or collaboration exists.
(d) Any deduction constituting a contribution on behalf of the person employed to funds
established by the employer or representatives of employees, or both, for the purpose
of providing either from principal or income, or both, medical or hospital care, pensions
or annuities on retirement, death benefits, compensation for injuries, illness, accidents,
sickness, or disability, or for insurance to provide any of the foregoing. or
unemployment benefits, vacation pay, savings accounts, or similar payments for the
benefit of employees, their families and dependents: Provided, however, That the
following standards are met: (1) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law; (2)
it is either: (i) Voluntarily consented to by the employee in writing and in advance of
the period in which the work is to be done and such consent is not a condition either
for the obtaining of or for the continuation of employment, or (ii) provided for in a bona
fide collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and
representatives of its employees; (3) no profit or other benefit is otherwise obtained,
directly or indirectly, by the contractor or subcontractor or any affiliated person in the
form of commission, dividend, or otherwise; and (4) the deductions shall serve the
convenience and interest of the employee.
(e) Any deduction contribution toward the purchase of United States Defense Stamps and
Bonds when voluntarily authorized by the employee.
(f) Any deduction requested by the employee to enable him to repay loans to or to
purchase shares in credit unions organized and operated in accordance with Federal
and State credit union statutes.
(g) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions
to governmental or quasi-governmental agencies, such as the American Red Cross.
(h) Any deduction voluntarily authorized by the employee for the making of contributions
to Community Chests, United Givers Funds, and similar charitable organizations.
(i) Any deductions to pay regular union initiation fees and membership dues, not including
fines or special assessments: Provided, however, that a collective bargaining
agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and representatives of its
employees provides for such deductions and the deductions are not otherwise
prohibited by law.
(j) Any deduction not more than for the "reasonable cost' of board, lodging, or other
facilities meeting the requirements of section 3(m) of the Fair Labor Standards Act of
1938, as amended, and Part 431 of this title. When such a deduction is made the
additional records required under SS 516.27(a) of this title shall be kept.
Section 3.6 – Payroll deductions permissible with the approval of the Secretary of Labor.
Any contractor or subcontractor may apply to the Secretary of Labor for permission to make any
deduction not permitted under SS 3.5. The Secretary may grant permissions whenever he finds
that:
(a) The contractor, subcontractor, or any affiliated person does not make a profit or benefit
directly or indirectly from the deduction either in the form of a commission, dividend,
or otherwise;
(b) The deduction is not otherwise prohibited by law;
(c) The deduction is either (1) voluntarily consented to by the employee in writing and in
advance of the period in which the work to be done, and such consent is not a condition
either for the obtaining of employment or its continuance, or (2) provided for in a bona
fide collective bargaining agreement between the contractor or subcontractor and
representatives of its employees; and
(d) The deduction serves the convenience and interest of the employee.
Section 3.7 – Applications for the approval of the Secretary of Labor.
Any application for the making of payroll deductions under SS 3.6 shall comply with the
requirements prescribed in the following paragraphs of this section:
(a) The application shall be in writing and shall be addressed to the Secretary of Labor.
(b) The application shall identify the contract or contracts under which the work in question
is to be performed. Permission will be given for deductions only on specific, identified
contracts, except upon a showing of exceptional circumstances.
(c) The application shall state affirmatively that there is compliance with the standards set
forth in the provisions of SS 3.6. The affirmation shall be accompanied by a full
statement of the facts indicating such compliance.
(d) The application shall include a description of the proposed deduction, the purpose to
be served thereby, and the classes of laborers or mechanics from whose wages the
proposed deduction would be made.
(e) The application shall state the name and business of any third person to whom any
funds obtained from the proposed deductions are to be transmitted and the affiliation
of such person, if any, with the applicant.
Section 3.8 – Action by the Secretary of Labor upon applications.
The Secretary of Labor shall decide whether or not the requested deduction is permissible under
provisions of SS 3.6; and shall notify the applicant in writing of his decision.
Section 3.9 – Prohibited payroll deductions.
Deductions not elsewhere provided for by this part and which are not found to be permissible
under SS 3.6 are prohibited.
Section 3.10 – Methods of payment of wages.
The payment of wages shall be by cash, negotiable instruments payable on demand. or the
additional forms of compensation for which deductions are permissible under this part. No other
methods of payment shall be recognized on work subject to the Copeland Act.
Section 3.11 – Regulations part of contract.
All contracts made with respect to the construction, prosecution, completion, or repair of any
public building or public work or building or work financed in whole or in part by loans or grants
from the United States covered by the regulations in this part shall expressly bind the contractor
or subcontractor to comply with such of the regulations in this part as may be applicable. In this
regard, see SS 5.5(a) of this subtitle.
14.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Including Equal Opportunity Provisions
1. Enumeration of Plans, Specifications and Addenda
2. Stated Allowances
3. Special Hazards
4. Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s Public Liability, Vehicle Liability and Property Damage
Insurance
5. Photographs of Project
6. Schedule of Occupational Classifications and Minimum Hourly Wage Rates
7. Builder’s Risk Insurance
8. Special Equal Opportunity Provisions
9. Certification of Compliance with Air and Water Acts
10. Special Conditions Pertaining to Hazards, Safety Standards and Accident Prevention
11. Energy Efficiency
12. Access to Records
13. Wage Rate Determination(s)
14. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
1. Plans, Specifications and Addenda
The Plans, Specifications and Addenda which form a part of this Contract, as set forth in
paragraph 1 of the General Conditions, “Contract and Contract Documents”:
2. Stated Allowances - None
3. Special Hazards
The Contractor’s and his Subcontractor’s Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance
shall provide adequate protection against the following special hazards:
4. Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s Public Liability, Vehicle Liability and Property Damage
Insurance
As required under paragraph 28 of the General Conditions, the Contractor’s Public Liability
Insurance and Vehicle Insurance shall be in an amount not less than $
for
injuries, including accidental death, to any one person, and subject to the same limit for
each person, in an amount not less than $
on account of one accident, and
Contractor’s Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $
.
The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his Subcontractors to procure and to
maintain during the life of his subcontract, Subcontractor’s Public Liability and Property
Damage Insurance of the type and in the same amounts as specified in the preceding
paragraph, or (2) insure the activities of his Subcontractors in his own policy.
5. Photographs of Project
As provided in paragraph 30 of General Conditions, the Contractor will furnish
photographs in the number, type and stage as enumerated below:
6. Schedule of Occupational Classifications and Minimum Hourly Wage Rate as required
under paragraph 52 of the General Conditions.
7. Builder’s Risk Insurance
As provided in the General Conditions, paragraph 28(e), the Contractor will maintain
Builder’s Risk Insurance (fire and extended coverage) on a 100 percent completed value
basis on the insurable portions of the project for the benefit of the Owner, the Contractor
and all Subcontractors, as their interests may appear.
8. Special Equal Opportunity Provisions
A. 3-Paragraph Equal Opportunity Clause for Activities and Contracts Not subject to
Executive Order 11246, as Amended (applicable to Federally assisted construction
contracts and related subcontracts $10,000 and under)
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:
1. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. The Contractor
shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants for employment are
employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to
their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not
be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer;
recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other
forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship.
2. The Contractor shall post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices to be provided by contracting officer setting
forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The Contractor shall state
that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without
regard to race, color, religion, or sex or national origin.
3. Contractors shall incorporate forgoing requirements in all subcontracts.
B. Executive Order 11246 (contracts/subcontracts above $10,000)
1. Section 202 Equal Opportunity Clause
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees the following:
a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant
for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin.
The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are
employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without
regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action
shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading,
demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or
termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection
for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in
conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for
employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this
nondiscrimination clause.
b. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees
placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants
will receive consideration without regard to race, color, religion, sex or
national origin.
c. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers
with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or
understanding, a notice to be provided by the Contract Compliance
Officer advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the
Contractor's commitment under this section, and shall post copies of the
notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for
employment.
d. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246
of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders
of the Secretary of Labor.
e. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations
and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit
access to his books, records and accounts by the Department and the
Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance
with such rules, regulations and others.
f.
In the event of the Contractor's non-compliance with the
nondiscrimination clauses of this Contract or with any of the said rules,
regulations or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated or
suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared
ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures
authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule,
regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by
law.
g. The Contractor will include the provisions of the sentence immediately
preceding paragraph a. and the provisions of paragraphs a. through g. in
every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules,
regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section
204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such
provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor. The
Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or
purchase order as the Department may direct as a means of enforcing
such provisions, including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided,
however. that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is
threatened with, litigation with a Subcontractor or vendor as a result of
such direction by the Department, the Contractor may request the United
States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United
States.
2.
Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment
Opportunity (Executive Order 11246) (applicable to contract/subcontracts
exceeding $10,000)
a. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity
Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity
Construction Contract Specifications”, set forth herein.
b. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed
in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each
trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows:
Goals for Minority
Participation
(12%)
Goals for Female
Participation
(6.9%)
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work
(whether or not it is Federal or Federally assisted) performed in the
covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a
geographic area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the
goals established for such geographic area where the work is actually
performed. With regard to this second area, the Contractor also is subject
to the goals for both its Federally involved and non-Federally involved
construction.
The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the
regulations in 41 CFR 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the
Equal Opportunity Clause. Specific affirmative action obligations required
by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60- 4.3(a), and its efforts to meet
the goals established for the geographical area where the contract
resulting from this solicitation is to be performed. The hours of minority
and female employment and training must be substantially uniform
throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade, and the
Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women
evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female
employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to
project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goal shall be a
violation of the Contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41
CFR 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total
work hours performed.
c. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the
Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days
of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier
for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation.
The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the
Subcontractor; employer identification number; estimated dollar amount
of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the contract is to
be performed.
d. As used in this notice, and in the contract resulting from the solicitation,
the "covered area" is (insert description of the geographical areas where
the contract is to be performed giving the state, county, and city, if any).
3.
Standard CDBG Assisted Employment Opportunity Construction Contract
Specifications (Executive Order 11246)
a. As used in these specifications:
(1) “Covered area" means the geographical area described in solicitation
from which this Contract resulted.
(2) “Director” means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance
Program, United States Department of Labor, or any person to whom
the Director delegates authority.
(3) "Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security
number used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S.
Treasury Department Form 941.
(4) “Minority” includes:
(a) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial
groups not of Hispanic origin).
(b) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central
or South American or other Spanish culture or origin, regardless
of race).
(c) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the
original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian
Subcontinent or the Pacific Islands.
(d) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in
any of the original peoples of North America and maintaining
identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation
or community identification.
(5) Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier,
subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it
shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the
provisions of these specifications and the notice which contains the
applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set
forth in the solicitations from which this Contract resulted.
(6) If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a
Hometown Plan approved by the U. S. Department of Labor in the
covered area either individually or through an association, its
affirmative action obligations on all work in the plan area (including
goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that plan for those
trades which have unions participating in the plan. Contractors must
be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the
provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or
Subcontractor participating in an approved plan is individually
required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to
make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the plan in each
trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance
by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved
Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor's or Subcontractor's
failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the plan goals and
timetables.
(7) The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action
standards provided in paragraphs 10a through p of these
specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation form which this
Contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of
employment and training of minority and female utilization the
Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction
trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered
construction Contractors- performing contracts in geographical areas
where they do not have a Federal or Federally-assisted construction
contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the
geographic area where the contract is being performed. Goals are
published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form and such
notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract
Compliance Programs office or from Federal procurement contracting
officers. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform
progress in meeting, its goals in each craft during the period specified.
(8) Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the
failure by a union with whom the Contractor has a collective
bargaining agreement to refer either minorities or women, shall
excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications,
Executive Order 11246, or the regulations promulgated pursuant
thereto.
(9) In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees
to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees
must be employed by the Contractor during the training period, and
the Contractor must have made a commitment to employ the
apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to
the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be trained
pursuant to training programs approved by the U. S. Department of
Labor.
(10) The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure
equal employment opportunity .The evaluation of the Contractor's
compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to
achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall
document these efforts fully, and shall implement affirmative action
steps at least as extensive as the following:
(a) Ensure and maintain a working environment free of
harassment, intimidation and coercion at all sites, and in
all facilities at which the Contractor's employees are
assigned to work. The Contractor, where possible, will
assign two or more women to each construction project.
The Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen,
superintendents and other on-site supervisory personnel
are aware of and carry out the Contractor's obligation to
maintain such a working environment, with specific
attention to minority or female individuals working at such
sites or in such facilities.
(b) Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female
recruitment sources, provide written notification to
minority and female recruitment sources and to
community organizations when the Contractor or its
unions have employment opportunities available, and
maintain a record of the organization’s responses.
(c) Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and
telephone numbers of each minority and female off- thestreet applicant and minority or female referral from a
union, a recruitment source or community organization
and of what action was taken with respect to each such
individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring
hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor
by the union or, if referred, not employed by the Contractor
this shall be documented in the file with the reason
therefore, along with whatever additional actions the
Contractor may have taken.
(d) Provide immediate written notification to the Director when
the union or unions with which the Contractor has a
collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the
Contractor a minority person or woman sent by the
Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information
that the union referral process has impeded the
Contractor’s efforts to meet its obligations.
(e) Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or
participate in training programs for the area which
expressly include minorities and women, including
upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee
programs relevant to the Contractor's employment needs,
especially those programs funded or approved by the
Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice
of these programs to the sources compiled under 10b
above.
(f) Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing
notice of the policy to unions and training programs and
requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in
meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy
manual and collective bargaining agreement; by
publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report,
etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management
personnel at least once a year; and by posting the
company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all
employees at each location where construction work is
performed.
(g) Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and
affirmative action obligations under these specifications
with all employees having any responsibility for hiring,
assignment, layoff, termination or other employment
decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such as superintendents,
general foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction
work at any job site. A written record shall be made and
maintained identifying the time and place of these
meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed
and disposition of the subject matter.
(h) Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by
including it in any advertising in the news media,
specifically including minority and female news media,
and providing written notification to and discussing the
Contractor EEO policy with other Contractors and
Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or
anticipates doing business.
(i) Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to
minority, female and community organizations, to schools
with minority and female students and to minority and
female recruitment and training organizations serving the
Contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not
later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance
of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any
recruitment source, the contractor shall send written
notification to organizations such as the above, describing
the openings, screening procedures and tests to be used
in the selection process.
(j) Encourage present minority and female employees to
recruit other minority persons and women and, where
reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation
employment to minority and female youth both on the site
and in other areas of a Contractor’s work force.
(k) Validate all tests and other selection requirements where
there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3.
(l) Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at
least of all minority and female personnel for promotional
opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or
to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such
opportunities.
(m) Ensure that seniority practices job classifications work
assignments and other personnel practices, do not have
a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all
personnel and employment related activities to ensure
that the EEO policy under the Contractor's obligations
under these specifications are being carried out.
(n) Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that separate or single-use toilet and
necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure
privacy between the sexes.
(o) Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of
offers for subcontracts from minority and female
construction contractors and suppliers, including
circulation of solicitations to minority and female
contractor associations and other business associations.
(p) Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors'
adherence to and performance under the Contractor's
EEO policies and affirmative action obligations.
(11) Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations
which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action
obligations (10a through p). The efforts of a contractor association,
joint contractor-union, contractor- community, or other similar group
of which the Contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted
as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 10a through p of
these specifications provided that the Contractor actively participates
in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a
positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the
industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are
reflected in the Contractor's minority and female workforce
participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and
timetables, and can provide access to documentation which
demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the
Contractor. The obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor’s
non-compliance.
(12) A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women
have been established. The Contractor, however, is required to
provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action
for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both
minority and non-minority. Consequently, the Contractor may be in
violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is employed in a
substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the
Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally, the
Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific
minority group of women is underutilized).
(13) The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative
action standards to discriminate against any person because of race,
color, religion, sex or national origin.
(14) The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person
or firm debarred from Government contracts pursuant to Executive
Order 11246.
(15) The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for
violation of these specifications and of the Equal Employment
Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and
cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered
pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its
implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract
Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such
sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications
and Executive Order 11246, as amended.
(16) The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these
specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at
least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 10 of
these specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its
effor1s to ensure equal employment oppor1unity .If the Contractor
fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the
implementing regulations or these specifications, the Director shall
proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
(17) The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all
employment related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy
is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof
as may be required by the Government and to keep records. Records
shall at least include for each employee the name, address,
telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any,
employee identification number when assigned, social security
number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper
or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the
indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was
performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily understandable
and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records
satisfy this requirement, Contractors shall not be required to maintain
separate records.
(18) Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the
application of other laws which establish different standards of
compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of
local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works
Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block
Grant Program).
C. Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities (over $10,000)
By the submission of this bid, the bidder, offeror, applicant or subcontractor certifies
that s/he does not maintain or provide for his/her employees any segregated facility at
any of his/her establishments, and that s/he does not permit employees to perform
their services at any location, under his/her control, where segregated facilities are
maintained. S/he certifies further that s/he will not maintain or provide for employees
any segregated facilities at any of his/'her establishments, and s/he will not permit
employees to perform their services at any location under his/her control where
segregated facilities are maintained. The bidder, offeror, applicant or subcontractor
agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Employment
Opportunity Clause of this Contract. As used in this certification, the term “segregated
facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms,
restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or
dressing areas, *transportation and housing facilities provided for employees which
are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color,
religion, or national origin, because of habit, local custom or otherwise. S/he further
agrees that (except where he/she has obtained identical certifications. from proposed
Subcontractors for specific time periods) he/she will obtain identical certification from
proposed Subcontractors prior to the award of subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which
are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause; that he/she will
retain such certifications in his/her files; and that he/she will forward the following
notice to such proposed Subcontractors (except where proposed Subcontractors have
submitted identical certifications for specific time periods).
* Parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas.
D. Title VI Clause, Civil Rights Act of 1964
Under Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, no person shall, on the grounds of race,
color or national origin be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or
be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity receiving Federal financial
assistance.
E. Section 109 Clause, Housing and Community Development Act of 1974
No person in the United States shall on the grounds of race, color national origin or
sex be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to
discrimination under any program or activity funded in whole or in part with funds made
available under this title.
F. “Section 3” Compliance in the Provision of Training, Employment and Business
Opportunities (Over $100,000)
1. The work to be performed under this Contract is on a project assisted under a
program providing direct Federal financial assistance from the Department of
Housing and Urban Development and is subject to the requirements of Section
3 of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C.
1701 u. Section 3 requires that to the greatest extent feasible, opportunities for
training and employment be given low and very low income residents of the
project area (including public housing residents and persons with disabilities)
and contracts for work in connection with the project be awarded to business
concerns which are owned by or employee low and very low income residents
of the project area.
2. The parties to this Contract will comply with the provisions of said Section 3
and the regulations issued pursuant thereto by the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development set forth in 24 CFR 135, and all applicable rules and
orders of the Department issued thereunder prior to the execution of this
Contract. The parties to this Contract certify and agree that they are under no
contractual or other disability which would prevent them from complying with
these requirements.
3. The Contractor will send to each labor organization or representative of
workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract
of understanding, if any, a notice advising the said labor organization or
workers' representative of his commitments under this Section 3 clause and
shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees
and applicants for employment or training.
4. The Contractor will include this Section 3 clause in every subcontract for work
in connection with the project and will, at the direction of the applicant for or
recipient of Federal financial assistance, take appropriate action pursuant to
the subcontract upon a finding that the Subcontractor is in violation of
regulations issued by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development, 24
CFR Part 135. The Contractor will not subcontract with any Subcontractor
where it has notice or knowledge that the latter has been found in violation of
regulations under 24 CFR Part 135 and will not let any subcontract unless the
Subcontractor has first provided it with a preliminary statement of ability to
comply with the requirements of these regulations.
5. Compliance with the provisions of Section 3, the regulations set forth in 24 CFR
Part 135, and all applicable rules and orders of the Department issued
hereunder prior to the execution of the Contract, shall be a condition of the
Federal financial assistance provided to the project, binding upon the applicant
or recipient for such assistance, its successors and assigns. Failure to fulfill
these requirements shall subject the applicant or recipient, its contractors and
subcontractors, its successors and assigns to those sanctions specified by the
grant or loan agreement or contract through which Federal assistance is
provided, and to such sanctions as are specified in 24 CFR Part 135.
G. Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Section 503 Handicapped (if $10,000 or over)
Affirmative Action for Handicapped Workers
1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of physical or mental handicap in regard to any position
for which the employee or applicant for employment is qualified. The
Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to employ, advance in employment
and otherwise treat qualified handicapped individuals without discrimination
based upon their physical or mental handicap in all employment practices such
as the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment,
advertising, layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation,
and selection for training including apprenticeship.
2. The Contractor agrees to comply with the rules, regulations and relevant orders
of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to the Act.
3. In the event of the Contractor's non-compliance with the requirements of this
clause, actions for non-compliance may be taken in accordance with the rules,
regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to
the Act.
4. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees
and applicants for employment notices in a form to be prescribed by the
Director, provided by or through the contracting officer. Such notices shall state
the Contractor's obligation under the law to take affirmative action to employ
and advance in employment qualified handicapped employees and applicants
for employment, and the rights of applicants and employees.
5. The Contractor will notify each labor union or representative of workers with
which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract understanding,
that the Contractor is bound by the terms of Section 503 of the Rehabilitation
Act of 1973, and is committed to take affirmative action to employ and advance
in employment physical and mentally handicapped individuals.
6. The Contractor will include the provisions of this clause in every subcontract or
purchase order of $10,000 or more unless exempted by rules, regulations or
orders of the Secretary issued pursuant to Section 503 of the Act, so that such
provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor
will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the
Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs may direct to
enforce such provisions, including action for non-compliance.
H. Vietnam Era Veterans’ Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as amended; 41 CFR
Part 60-250 (if $100,000 or over)
1. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because he or she is a special disabled veteran or veteran of the
Vietnam era in regard to any position for which the employee or applicant for
employment is qualified. The contractor agrees to take affirmative action to
employ, advance in employment and otherwise treat qualified individuals without
discrimination based on their status as a special disabled veteran or veteran of the
Vietnam era
i.
recruitment,
advertising,
and
job
application
procedures
ii. hiring, upgrading, promotion, award of tenure, demotion, transfer, layoff,
termination,
right
of
return
from
layoff
and
rehiring;
iii. rates of pay or any other form of compensation and changes in
compensation;
iv. job assignments, job classifications, organizational structures, position
descriptions,
lines
of
progression,
and
seniority
lists;
v. leaves
of
absence,
sick
leave,
or
any
other
leave;
vi. fringe benefits available by virtue of employment, whether or not
administered by the contractor
vii. selection and financial support for training, including apprenticeship,
and on-the-job training under 38 U.S.C 3687, professional meetings,
conferences, and other related activities, and selection for leaves of
absence to pursue training;
viii. activities sponsored by the contractor including social or recreational
programs; and
ix. any other term, condition, or privilege of employment.
2. The contractor agrees to immediately list all employment openings which exist at
the time of the execution of this contract and those which occur during the
performance of this contract, including those not generated by this contract and
including those occurring at an establishment of the contractor other than the one
wherein the contract is being performed, but excluding those of independently
operated corporate affiliates, at an appropriate local employment service office of
the state employment security agency wherein the opening occurs. Listing
employment openings with the U.S. Department of Labor's America's Job Bank
shall satisfy the requirement to list jobs with the local employment service office.
3. Listing of employment openings with the local employment service office pursuant
to this clause shall be made at least concurrently with the use of any other
recruitment source or effort and shall involve the normal obligations which attach
to the placing of a bona fide job order, including the acceptance of referrals of
veterans and nonveterans. The listing of employment openings does not require
the hiring of any particular job applicants or from any particular group of job
applicants, and nothing herein is intended to relieve the contractor from any
requirements in Executive orders or regulations regarding nondiscrimination in
employment.
4. Whenever the contractor becomes contractually bound to the listing provisions in
paragraphs 2 and 3 of this clause, it shall advise the state employment security
agency in each state where it has establishments of the name and location of each
hiring location in the state, provided that this requirement shall not apply to state
and local governmental contractors. As long as the contractor is contractually
bound to these provisions and has so advised the state agency, there is no need
to advise the state agency of subsequent contracts. The contractor may advise the
state agency when it is no longer bound by this contract clause.
5. The provisions of paragraphs 2 and 3 of this clause do not apply to the listing of
employment openings which occur and are filled outside of the 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Guam, and the Virgin
Islands.
6. As used in this clause:
i.
All employment openings includes all positions except executive and top
management, those positions that will be filled from within the contractor's
organization, and positions lasting three days or less. This term includes fulltime employment, temporary employment of more than three days' duration,
and
part-time
employment.
ii. Executive and top management means any employee:
a) Whose primary duty consists of the management of the enterprise in
which he or she is employed or of a customarily recognized
department
or
subdivision
thereof;
and
b) who customarily and regularly directs the work of two or more other
employees therein; and
c) who has the authority to hire or fire other employees or whose
suggestions and recommendations as to the hiring or firing and as
to the advancement and promotion or any other change of status of
other employees will be given particular weight; and
d) who customarily and regularly exercises discretionary powers; and
e) who does not devote more than 20 percent, or, in the case of an
employee of a retail or service establishment who does not devote as
much as 40 percent, of his or her hours of work in the work week to
activities which are not directly and closely related to the performance
of the work described in (a) through (d) of this paragraph 6. ii.;
Provided, that (e) of this paragraph 6.ii. shall not apply in the case of
an employee who is in sole charge of an independent establishment
or a physically separated branch establishment, or who owns at least
a 20-percent interest in the enterprise in which he or she is
employed.
iii. Positions that will be filled from within the contractor's organization means
employment openings for which no consideration will be given to persons
outside the contractor's organization (including any affiliates, subsidiaries, and
parent companies) and includes any openings which the contractor proposes
to fill from regularly established ``recall'' lists. The exception does not apply to
a particular opening once an employer decides to consider applicants outside
of his or her own organization.
7. The contractor agrees to comply with the rules, regulations, and relevant
orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to the Act.
8. In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the requirements of this
clause, actions for noncompliance may be taken in accordance with the rules,
regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to the
Act.
9. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notices in a form to be prescribed by the Deputy
Assistant Secretary for Federal Contract Compliance Programs, provided by or
through the contracting officer. Such notices shall state the rights of applicants
and employees as well as the contractor's obligation under the law to take
affirmative action to employ and advance in employment qualified employees
and applicants who are special disabled veterans or veterans of the Vietnam era.
The contractor must ensure that applicants or employees who are special
disabled veterans are informed of the contents of the notice (e.g., the contractor
may have the notice read to a visually disabled individual, or may lower the
posted notice so that it might be read by a person in a wheelchair).
10. The contractor will notify each labor organization or representative of workers
with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract
understanding, that the contractor is bound by the terms of the Vietnam Era
Veterans' Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as amended, and is
committed to take affirmative action to employ and advance in employment
qualified special disabled veterans and veterans of the Vietnam era.
11. The contractor will include the provisions of this clause in every subcontract or
purchase order of $10,000 or more, unless exempted by the rules, regulations,
or orders of the Secretary issued pursuant to the Vietnam Era Veterans'
Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974, as amended, so that such provisions will
be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such
action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the Deputy Assistant
Secretary for Federal Contract Compliance Programs may direct to enforce such
provisions, including action for noncompliance.
I. Age Discrimination Act of 1975
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: the
Contractor agrees not to exclude from participation, deny program benefits, or
discriminate on the basis of age.
9. Certification of Compliance with Air and Water Acts (applicable to Federally-assisted
construction contracts and related subcontracts exceeding ($100,000)
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply
with the requirements of the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 1857 et seq., the Federal
Water Pollution Contract Act, as amended, 33 USC 1251 et seq., and the regulations of the
Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part 15, as amended.
In addition to the foregoing requirements, all “nonexempt" Contractors and Subcontractors
shall furnish to the Owner, the following:
A. A stipulation by the Contractor or Subcontractors, that any facility to be utilized in
the performance of any nonexempt contract or subcontract, is not listed on the List
of Violating Facilities issued by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20.
B. Agreement by the Contractor to comply with all the requirements of Section 114 of
the Clean Air Act, as amended, (42 USC 1857c-8) and Section 308 of the Federal
Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, (33 USC 1318) relating to inspection,
monitoring, entry, reports and information, as well as all other requirements
specified in said Section 114 and Section 308, and all regulations and guidelines
issued thereunder.
C. A stipulation that as a condition for the award of the Contract, prompt notice will be
given of any notification received from the Director, Office of Federal Activities,
EPA, indicating that a facility utilized, or to be utilized for the Contract, is under
consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities.
D. Agreement by the Contractor that he will include, or cause to be included, the
criteria and requirements in paragraphs A through D of this section in every
nonexempt subcontract and requiring that the Contractor will take such actions as
the Government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions.
10. Special Conditions Pertaining to Hazards, Safety Standards and Accident Prevention
A. Lead-Based Paint Hazards (applicable to contracts for construction or
rehabilitation of residential structures)
The construction or rehabilitation of residential structures is subject to the HUD
Lead-Based Paint regulations, 24 CFR Part 35. The Contractor and
Subcontractors shall comply with the provisions for the elimination of lead- based
paint hazards under sub-part B of said regulations. The Owner will be responsible
for the inspections and certifications required under Section 35.14(f) thereof.
B. Use of Explosives (modify as required)
When the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work, the
Contractor shall observe all local, State and Federal laws in purchasing and
handling of explosives. The Contractor shall take all necessary precaution to
protect completed work, neighboring property, water lines or other underground
structures. Where there is danger to structures or property from blasting, the
charges shall be reduced and the material shall be covered with suitable timer,
steel or rope mats. The Contractor shall notify all owners of public utility property
of intention to use explosives at least eight hours before blasting is done close to
such property. Any supervision or direction of use of explosives by the Engineer,
does not in any way reduce the responsibility of the Contractor or his Surety for
damages that may be caused by such use.
C. Danger Signals and Safety Devices (modify as required)
The Contractor shall make all necessary precautions to guard against damages to
property and injury to persons. He shall put up and maintain in good condition,
sufficient red or warning lights at night, suitable barricades and other devices
necessary to protect the public. In case the Contractor fails or neglects to take
such precautions, the Owner may have such lights and barricades installed and
charge the cost of this work to the Contractor. Such action by the Owner does not
relieve the Contractor of any liability incurred under these specifications or
Contract.
11. Energy Efficiency
The Contractor shall recognize mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency,
which are contained in the State Energy Conservation Plan issued in Compliance with the
Energy Policy and Conservation Act.
12. Access to Records
The Contractor shall maintain accounts and project records, including personnel, property and
financial records, adequate to identify and account for all costs pertaining to the Contract and
such other records as may be deemed necessary by the City to assure proper accounting for
all project funds, both CDBG and non-CDBG shares. These records will be made available to
the City, the Department of Local Government, Commonwealth of Kentucky Finance &
Administration Cabinet, Commonwealth of Kentucky Auditor of Public Audits, Commonwealth
of Kentucky Legislative Research Commission, U.S. Department of Housing and Urban
Development, the U. S. Department of Labor, and the Comptroller General of the United
States, or any of their duly authorized representatives. These parties shall have access to
any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor, which are directly pertinent to
the project, for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts and transcriptions. All
records shall be maintained for five years after project closeout.
13. Wage Rate Determination(s)
(See attached Wage Rates)
14. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
All grantees and subgrantee’s contracts must contain provisions requiring compliance with
sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 USC 327330) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 CFR Part 5) where
construction contracts are awarded by grantees or subgrantees in excess of $2,000, and in
excess of $2,500 for other contracts involving the employment of mechanics and laborers.
END OF DOCUMENT
General Decision Number: KY140117 01/03/2014
KY117
Superseded General Decision Number: KY20130118
State: Kentucky
Construction Type: Building
Counties: Allen, Bell, Casey, Clay, Clinton, Cumberland,
Garrard, Knox, Lincoln, Logan, Metcalfe, Monroe, Powell,
Rockcastle, Wayne and Whitley Counties in Kentucky.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family
homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories).
Modification Number
0
Publication Date
01/03/2014
ASBE0046-007 05/01/2012
BELL, CLAY, CLINTON, KNOX, ROCKCASTLE, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST
INSULATOR........................$ 23.39
10.96
---------------------------------------------------------------ASBE0051-002 04/01/2013
CASEY, GARRARD, LINCOLN, & METCALFE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST
INSULATOR........................$ 24.92
11.85
---------------------------------------------------------------ASBE0080-007 03/04/2013
POWELL COUNTY
Rates
Fringes
ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST
INSULATOR........................$ 31.04
18.33
---------------------------------------------------------------ASBE0086-005 03/01/2013
ALLEN, LOGAN, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST
1
INSULATOR........................$ 25.45
10.61
---------------------------------------------------------------CARP0064-009 06/01/2013
ALLEN, LOGAN, METCALFE, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
CARPENTER (Form Work Only).......$ 22.90
14.39
---------------------------------------------------------------CARP1650-008 06/01/2013
BELL, CASEY, CLAY, CLINTON, CUMBERLAND, GARRARD, KNOX, LINCOLN,
POWELL, ROCKCASTLE, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
CARPENTER (Form Work Only).......$ 21.98
12.65
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0369-017 05/29/2013
BELL, CASEY, CLAY, GARRARD, KNOX, LINCOLN, LOGAN, METCALFE,
POWELL, ROCKCASTLE, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (Includes Low
Voltage Wiring and Alarm
Installation)....................$ 29.48
14.37
---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0429-012 02/01/2010
ALLEN, CLINTON, CUMBERLAND, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
ELECTRICIAN (Includes Low
Voltage Wiring and Alarm
Installation)....................$ 21.85
10.35
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0181-073 06/01/2013
CASEY, CLAY, CLINTON, GARRARD, KNOX, LINCOLN, POWELL,
ROCKCASTLE, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Cherry Picker, Crane,
Forklift, Grader/Blade......$ 26.84
Oiler.......................$ 23.13
Fringes
13.90
13.90
2
CRANE WITH BOOM 150 FEET & OVER, INCLUDING JIB SHALL RECEIVE
$.75 ABOVE RATE
ALL CRANES WITH PILING LEADS WILL RECEIVE $.50 ABOVE RATE
REGARDLESS OF BOOM LENGTH
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0181-074 07/01/2013
LOGAN COUNTY
Rates
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Cherry Picker, Crane,
Forklift, Grader/Blade......$ 27.17
Oiler.......................$ 23.46
Fringes
13.90
13.90
CRANE WITH BOOM 150 FEET & OVER, INCLUDING JIB SHALL RECEIVE
$.75 ABOVE RATE
ALL CRANES WITH PILING LEADS WILL RECEIVE $.50 ABOVE RATE
REGARDLESS OF BOOM LENGTH
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0181-075 06/01/2013
ALLEN, CUMBERLAND, METCALFE, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Cherry Picker, Crane,
Forklift, Grader/Blade......$ 26.85
Oiler.......................$ 21.57
Fringes
13.90
13.90
CRANE WITH BOOM 150 FEET & OVER, INCLUDING JIB SHALL RECEIVE
$.75 ABOVE RATE
ALL CRANES WITH PILING LEADS WILL RECEIVE $.50 ABOVE RATE
REGARDLESS OF BOOM LENGTH
---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0181-076 06/01/2013
BELL COUNTY
Rates
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
Cherry Picker, Crane,
Forklift, Grader/Blade......$ 29.83
Oiler.......................$ 24.09
Fringes
13.90
13.90
3
CRANE WITH BOOM 150 FEET & OVER, INCLUDING JIB SHALL RECEIVE
$.75 ABOVE RATE
ALL CRANES WITH PILING LEADS WILL RECEIVE $.50 ABOVE RATE
REGARDLESS OF BOOM LENGTH
---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0070-010 06/01/2013
CASEY, CUMBERLAND, GARRARD, LINCOLN, METCALFE, & ROCKCASTLE
COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL,
REINFORCING, AND STRUCTURAL......$ 26.47
19.30
---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0384-007 05/01/2013
CLAY, CLINTON, KNOX, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL,
REINFORCING AND ORNAMENTAL.......$ 23.42
10.86
---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0492-012 05/01/2013
ALLEN, LOGAN, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL,
REINFORCING AND STRUCTURAL.......$ 23.84
10.96
---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0769-010 06/01/2013
POWELL COUNTY
Rates
Fringes
IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL,
REINFORCING AND ORNAMENTAL.......$ 31.24
20.38
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0118-010 05/01/2010
CASEY, LINCOLN, & METCALFE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER (Brush)..................$ 18.50
10.30
---------------------------------------------------------------4
PAIN0238-004 06/01/2010
GARRARD, POWELL, & ROCKCASTLE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER (Brush)..................$ 22.85
8.10
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0437-012 01/01/2007
BELL, CLAY, CLINTON, KNOX, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER (Brush)..................$ 16.96
2.20
---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0456-012 07/01/2011
ALLEN, CUMBERLAND, LOGAN, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER (Brush)..................$ 17.55
9.65
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0248-008 06/01/2013
CLAY COUNTY
Rates
Fringes
PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC
Pipe Installation)...............$ 33.00
17.93
PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe
Installation)....................$ 33.00
17.93
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0452-005 11/01/2013
BELL, CASEY, CLINTON, GARRARD, KNOX, LINCOLN, POWELL,
ROCKCASTLE, WAYNE, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC
Pipe Installation)...............$ 30.00
16.50
PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe
Installation)....................$ 30.00
16.50
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0502-010 08/01/2013
ALLEN, CUMBERLAND, METCALFE, & MONROE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
5
PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC
Pipe Installation)...............$ 32.00
17.17
PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe
Installation)....................$ 32.00
17.17
---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0633-008 08/01/2013
LOGAN COUNTY
Rates
Fringes
PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC
Pipe Installation)...............$ 29.87
14.25
PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC Pipe
Installation)....................$ 29.87
14.25
---------------------------------------------------------------SFKY0669-003 07/01/2013
Rates
Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire
Sprinklers)......................$ 30.14
17.12
---------------------------------------------------------------SHEE0024-017 06/01/2010
BELL, KNOX, & WHITLEY COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER (Excluding
HVAC Duct Installation)..........$ 25.76
17.19
---------------------------------------------------------------* SHEE0110-019 12/01/2013
ALLEN, CASEY, CLAY, CLINTON, CUMBERLAND, GARRARD, LINCOLN,
LOGAN, METCALFE, MONROE, POWELL, ROCKCASTLE, & WAYNE COUNTIES
Rates
Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER (Excluding
HVAC Duct Installation)..........$ 28.66
18.03
---------------------------------------------------------------SUKY2010-179 07/30/2010
Rates
Fringes
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 23.03
2.06
CARPENTER (Drywall Hanging
Only)............................$ 13.85
0.00
CARPENTER (Hardwood and
Carpet Installation).............$ 16.63
6.08
6
CARPENTER, Excludes Drywall
Hanging, Form Work, and
Hardwood and Carpet
Installation.....................$ 14.92
0.00
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 17.20
3.34
DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 13.75
0.00
LABORER:
Carpenter Tender.......$
9.00
0.00
LABORER:
Common or General......$ 12.59
4.01
LABORER:
Mason Tender - Brick...$ 16.89
0.00
LABORER: Mason Tender Cement/Concrete..................$ 13.37
0.00
OPERATOR:
Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 21.32
6.98
OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid
Steer/Skid Loader................$ 23.54
0.00
OPERATOR:
Bulldozer.............$ 21.40
0.00
OPERATOR:
Loader (Front End)....$ 23.94
9.15
PAINTER:
Roller.................$ 14.72
2.92
ROOFER...........................$ 16.42
1.50
SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct
Installation Only)...............$ 12.70
2.92
---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing
operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within
the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
---------------------------------------------------------------The body of each wage determination lists the classification
and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the
7
cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage
determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical
order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular
rate is union or non-union.
Union Identifiers
An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with
characters other than "SU" denotes that the union
classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that
classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first
four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the
four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union
number or district council number where applicable , i.e.,
Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is
an internal number used in processing the wage determination.
The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the
effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective
bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above
example.
Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any
changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the
rates.
0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually
each January.
Non-Union Identifiers
Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived
from survey data by computing average rates and are not union
rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may
include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007
5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates,
LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the
survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the
wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates
the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued
as a General Wage Determination on that date.
Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change
until a new survey is conducted.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
8
*
*
*
*
an existing published wage determination
a survey underlying a wage determination
a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests
for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations
Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an
interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the
interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an
interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION
9
Steven L. Beshear
Governor
KENTUCKY LABOR CABINET
DEPARTMENT OF WORKPLACE STANDARDS
DIVISION OF EMPLOYMENT STANDARDS,
APPRENTICESHIP & MEDIATION
1047 US Hwy 127 S - Suite 4
Frankfort, Kentucky 40601
Phone: (502) 564-3534
Fax (502) 696-1897
www.labor.ky.gov
Larry Roberts
Secretary
Anthony Russell
Commissioner
January 8, 2014
Martina Hadley
LCADD
PO Box 1570
Russell Springs KY 42642
Re:
City of Albany, Fire Station
Advertising Date as Shown on Notification: January 23, 2014
Dear Martina Hadley:
This office is in receipt of your written notification on the above project as required by KRS 337.510
(1).
I am enclosing a copy of the current prevailing wage determination number CR 7-018, dated
October 2, 2012 for CLINTON County. This schedule of wages shall be attached to and made a
part of the specifications for the work, printed on the bidding blanks, and made a part of the
contract for the construction of the public works between the public authority and the successful
bidder or bidders.
The determination number assigned to this project is based upon the advertising date contained in
your notification. There may be modifications to this wage determination prior to the advertising
date indicated. In addition, if the contract is not awarded within 90 days of this advertising date or
if the advertising date is modified, a different set of prevailing rates of wages may be applicable. It
will be the responsibility of the public authority to contact this office and verify the correct schedule
of the prevailing rates of wages for use on the project. Your project number is as follows: 027-B00043-12-7, Building
Sincerely,
Anthony Russell
Commissioner
An Equal Opportunity Employer M/F/D
KENTUCKY LABOR CABINET
PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION
CURRENT REVISION
LOCALITY NO. 018
Determination No. CR-7-018
Project No. 027-B-00043-12-7
Type: __x_ Bldg ____ HH
Date of Determination: October 2, 2012
This schedule of the prevailing rate of wages for Locality No. 018, which includes Clinton, Cumberland, McCreary,
Monroe, Wayne and Whitley Counties, has been determined in accordance with the provisions of KRS 337.505 to
337.550. This determination shall be referred to as Prevailing Wage Determination No. CR-7-018.
Apprentices shall be permitted to work as such subject to Administrative Regulations adopted by the Commissioner
of Workplace Standards. Copies of these regulations will be furnished upon request to any interested person.
Overtime is to be computed at not less than one and one-half (1 1/2) times the indicated base rate for all hours
worked in excess of eight (8) per day, or in excess of forty (40) per week. However, KRS 337.540 permits an
employee and employer to agree, in writing, that the employee will be compensated at a straight time base rate for
hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours in any one workday, but not more than ten (10) hours worked in any one
workday, if such written agreement is prior to the over eight (8) hours in a workday actually being worked, or where
provided for in a collective bargaining agreement. The fringe benefit rate is to be paid for each hour worked at a
straight time rate for all hours worked. Fringe benefit amounts are applicable for all hours worked except when
otherwise noted. Welders will receive rate for craft in which welding is incidental.
No laborer, workman or mechanic shall be paid at a rate less than that of the General Laborer except those classified
as bona fide apprentices registered with the Kentucky State Apprenticeship Supervisor unless otherwise specified in
this schedule of wage rates.
NOTE: The type of construction shall be determined by applying the following definitions.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Building construction is the construction of sheltered enclosures with walk-in access for the purpose of housing
persons, machinery, equipment, or supplies. It includes all construction of such structures, the installation of utilities
and the installation of equipment, both above and below grade level, as well as incidental grading, utilities and paving.
HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION
Highway construction includes the construction, alteration or repair of roads, streets, highways, runways, taxiways,
alleys, trails, paths, parking areas, and other similar projects not incidental to building or heavy construction. It
includes all incidental construction in conjunction with the highway construction project.
HEAVY CONSTRUCTION
Heavy projects are those projects that are not properly classified as either "building" or "highway". For example,
dredging projects, water and sewer line projects, dams, flood control projects, sewage treatment plants and facilities,
and water treatment plants and facilities are considered heavy.
________________________
_____
Michael L. Dixon, Commissioner
Department of Workplace Standards
Kentucky Labor Cabinet
1
CR-7-018
October 2, 2012
CLASSIFICATIONS
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
ASBESTOS/INSULATION WORKERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$23.39
11.01
BOILERMAKERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$21.75
8.81
BRICKLAYERS:
BASE RATE
$18.30
CARPENTERS:
Carpenters:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$19.88
10.40
Piledrivermen:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$20.38
10.40
Carpenters:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$18.35
5.80
Divers:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$28.05
4.93
Piledrivermen:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$18.70
4.93
CEMENT MASONS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$20.70
9.70
ELECTRICIANS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$29.32
13.98
LINEMAN:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$31.86
11.63
EQUIPMENT OPERATOR:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$28.48
10.94
GROUNDMAN:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$18.87
9.03
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$24.25
7.76
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS:
2
CR-7-018
October 2, 2012
CLASSIFICATIONS
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
GLAZIERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$7.29
0.00
IRONWORKERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$26.34
18.84
LABORERS/BUILDING:
GROUP 1
Laborers, general carpenter tenders, cement finisher tenders, placing of concrete, wrecking on building by Laborers,
hand digging and hand backfilling of ditches where the signatory employer controls the work assignment, and the
clearing of rights of way and building site, curing of concrete and application hardener, handling chemically treated
lumber, installing of wood sheeting and shoring, signal laborers concrete bucket, cleaning and moving of general
purpose materials, general clean up of all scrap and debris:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$18.42
FRINGE BENEFITS
9.18
GROUP 2
Mason tender, side rail setter (metal), stackman, fork lift operators, masonry and plastering contractors only, power
driven Georgia buggy, chain saw, vibrator operators, mesh handler, power tools (air, diesel, electric, gasoline), wagon
drill, pipe layer, wall man treatment of exposed concrete (chip, bush, hammer & rub), concrete saw, gasoline tamper
machine, walk behind trenching machine, burner man, joint maker, asphalt raker, mobile sweeper:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$18.62
FRINGE BENEFITS
9.18
GROUP 3
Air track driller, intorflax burning rod, gunnite nozzle man operator, sewer tunnel laborers (free air), sand hog or
mucker, (free air), welder:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$18.82
FRINGE BENEFITS
9.18
GROUP 4
Holeman drilled piers, augured, caissons, sand miner (tunnel free air), caisson workers, powderman, construction
specialist:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$19.42
FRINGE BENEFITS
9.18
GROUP 5
Tunnel man and tunnel miners (pressure and free air) shall receive $1.50 per hour premium above the General
Laborers wage rate. Environment Worker, Toxic and Hazardous Waste, asbestos removal and lead abatement shall
receive $1.50 per hour premium above the General Laborers Group 1 wage rate. Any certification required whether
actual skill is used by the Contractor will receive pay under Group 5:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$19.92
9.18
CR-7-018
3
October 2, 2012
CLASSIFICATIONS
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
LABORERS/HEAVY & HIGHWAY:
GROUP 1
Aging and curing of concrete (any mode or method), asbestos abatement worker, asphalt plant laborers, asphalt laborers;
batch truck dumpers; carpenter tenders, cement mason tenders, cleaning of machines, concrete laborers, demolition
laborers, dredging laborers, drill helper, environmental laborer - nuclear, radiation, toxic and hazardous waste – Level D,
flagmen, grade checkers, all hand digging and hand back filling, highway marker placers, landscaping laborers, mesh
handlers and placers, puddler, railroad laborers, rip-rap and grouters, right of way laborers, sign, guard rail and fence
installers (all types), signalmen, sound barrier installer, storm and sanitary sewer laborers, swampers, truck spotters and
dumpers, wrecking of concrete forms, general cleanup:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$21.61
10.95
GROUP 2
Batter board men (sanitary and storm sewer), brickmason tenders, mortar mixer operator, scaffold builders, burner and
welder, bushammers, chain saw operator, concrete saw operators, deckhand scow man, dry cement handlers,
environmental laborers – nuclear, radiation, toxic and hazardous waste – Level C, forklift operators for masonry, form
setters, green concrete cutting, hand operated grouter and grinder machine operator, jack hammers, lead paint abatement,
pavement breakers, paving joint machine, pipe layers – laser operators (non-metallic), plastic pipe fusion, power driven
Georgia buggy and wheel barrow, power post hole diggers, precast manhole setters, walk-behind tampers, walk-behind
trenchers, sand blasters, concrete chippers, surface grinders, vibrator operators, wagon drillers:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
$21.86
FRINGE BENEFITS
10.95
GROUP 3
Air track driller (all types), asphalt luteman and rakersm gunnite nozzleman, gunnite operators and mixers, grout pump
operator, powderman and blaster, side rail setters, rail paved ditches, screw operators, tunnel laborers (free air), and
water blasters:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
$21.91
FRINGE BENEFITS
10.95
GROUP 4
Caisson workers (free air), cement finishers, environmental laborer – nuclear, radiation, toxic and hazardous waste – Level
A and B, miners and drillers (free air), tunnel blasters, and tunnel mockers (free air), directional and horizontal boring, air
track drillers (all types), powder man and blasters, troxler and concrete tester if laborer is utilized:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
$22.51
FRINGE BENEFITS
10.95
MARBLE, TILE & TERRAZZO SETTERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$22.64
6.10
MARBLE, TILE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$15.42
5.41
CR-7-022
October 2, 2012
Page Six
4
CLASSIFICATIONS
MILLWRIGHTS:
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$13.90
1.85
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
$12.41
OPERATING ENGINEERS/BUILDING:
BUILDING CLASS A-1: (NCCCO or OECP CERTIFIED)
Crane, dragline, hoist (1 drum when used for stack or chimney construction or repair), hoisting engineer (2 or more
drums), orangepeel bucket, overhead crane, piledriver, truck crane, tower crane, hydraulic crane:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$27.28
13.40
BUILDING CLASS A:
Articulating Dump, Auto Patrol, Batcher Plant, Bituminous Paver, Cableway, Carrydeck Crane, Central Compressor Plant,
Clamshell, Concrete Mixer (21 cu. ft. or over), Concrete Pump, Crane, Crusher Plant, Derrick, Derrick Boat, Directional
Boring Machine, Ditching and Trenching Machine, Dragline, Dredge Operator, Dredge Engineer, Elevating Grader and all
types of Loaders, Forklift (regardless of lift height), GPS Systems (on equipment within the classification), Hoe-Type
Machine, Hoist (1 drum when used for stack or chimney construction or repair), Hoisting Engine (2 or more drums), Laser
or Remote Controlled Equipment (within the classification), Locomotive, Motor Scraper, Carry-all Scoop, Bulldozer, Heavy
Duty Welder, Mechanic, Orangepeel Bucket, Piledriver, Power Blade, Motor Grader, Roller (bituminous), Scarifier, Shovel,
Tractor Shovel, Truck Crane, Winch Truck, Push Dozer, Highlift, All Types of Boom Cats, Self Contained Core Drill, Hopto,
Tow or Push Boat, A-Frame Winch Truck, Concrete Paver, Gradeall, Hoist, Hyster, Pumpcrete, Ross Carrier, Boom, Tail
Boom, Rotary Drill, Hydro Hammer, Mucking Machine, Rock Spreader attached to equipment, Scoopmobile, KeCal Loader,
Tower
Cranes (French, German and other types), Hydrocrane, Backfiller, Gurries, Subgrader, Tunnel Mining Machines including
Moles, Shields, or similar types of Tunnel Mining Equipment:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$26.25
13.40
Operators on cranes with boom one-hundred fifty feet (150’) and over including jib, shall receive seventy-five
cents ($.75) above base rate. All cranes with piling leads will receive $.50 above base rate regardless of boom
length
BUILDING CLASS B:
All Air Compressors (over 900 cfm), Bituminous Mixer, Joint Sealing Machine, Concrete Mixer (under 21 cu. ft), Form
Grader, Roller (rock), Tractor (50 HP and over), Bull Float, Finish Machine, Outboard Motor Boat, Flexplane, Fireman,
Boom Type Tamping Machine, Truck Crane Oiler, Greaser on Grease Facilities servicing Heavy Equipment, Switchman or
Brakeman, Mechanic Helper, Whirley Oiler, Self-Propelled Compactor, Tractair and Road Widening Trencher and Farm
Tractor with Attachments (except backhoe, highlift and endloader), Elevator (regardless of ownership when used for
hoisting any building materials), Hoisting Engineer (1 drum or buck hoist), Firebrick (masonry excluded), Well Points,
Grout Pump, Throttle-Valve Man, Tugger, Electric Vibrator Compactor, and Caisson Drill Helper:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$22.67
FRINGE BENEFITS
13.40
CR-7-018
October 2, 2012
5
CLASSIFICATIONS
OPERATING ENGINEERS (CONTINUED):
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
BUILDING CLASS C:
Bituminous Distributor, Cement Gun, Conveyor, Mud Jack, Paving Joint Machine, Roller (earth), Tamping Machine, Tractors
(under 50 HP), Vibrator, Oiler, Concrete Saw, Burlap and Curing Machine, Hydro-Seeder, Power Form handling Equipment,
Deckhand Steersman, Hydraulic Post Driver and Drill Helper:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
$21.11
FRINGE BENEFITS
13.40
All Building Operators assigned to work below ground level are to be paid ten percent (10%) above base wage
rate. This does not apply to open cut work
OPERATING ENGINEERS/HEAVY HIGHWAY:
HEAVY HIGHWAY CLASS A-1: (NCCCO or OECP CERTIFIED)
Cableway, carry deck crane, cherry picker, clamshell, crane, derrick, derrick boat, dragline, hoist engine (2 or more
drums), hydraulic boom truck, hydrocrane, orangepeel bucket, overhead crane, piledriver, rough terrain crane, tower
cranes (French, German and other types), truck crane:
HEAVY HIGHWAY
BASE RATES
FRINGE BENEFITS
$28.40
13.40
HEAVY HIGHWAY CLASS A:
A-Frame Winch Truck, Auto Patrol, Backfiller, Batcher Plant, Bituminous Paver, Bituminous Transfer Machine, All types of
Boom Cats, Bulldozer, Cableway, Carry-All Scoop, Carry Deck Crane, Central Compressor Plant Operator, Clamshell,
Concrete Mixer (21 cu. ft. or over), Concrete Paver, Truck-Mounted Concrete Pump, Core Drills, Crane, Crusher Plant,
Derrick, Derrick Boat, Ditching and Trenching Machine, Dragline, Dredge Operator, Dredge Engineer, Earth Movers,
Elevating Grader and all types of Loaders, Grade-All, Gurries, Heavy Equipment Robotics Operator/Mechanic, Highlift,
Hoe-Type Machine, Hoist (two or more drums), Hoisting Engine (two or more drums), Horizontal Directional Drill
Operator, Hydraulic Boom Truck, Hydrocrane, Hyster, KeCal Loader, Letourneau, Locomotive, Mechanic, Mechanically
Operated Laser Screed, Mechanic Welder, Mucking Machine, Motor Scraper, Orangepeel Bucket, Piledriver, Power Blade,
Pumpcrete, Push Dozer, Rock Spreader attached to Equipment, All Rotary Drills, Roller (bituminous), Scarifier,
Scoopmobile, Shovel, Side Boom, Subgrader, Tailboom, Telescoping Type Forklift, Tow or Push Boat, Tower Cranes
(French, German and other types), Tractor Shovel, Truck Crane, Tunnel Mining Machines including Moles, Shields, or
Similar types of Tunnel Mining Equipment:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$27.35
13.40
Operators on cranes with booms one hundred fifty feet (150’) and over including jib shall receive $.50 above
base rate.
CR-7-018
October 2, 2012
CLASSIFICATIONS
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
6
OPERATING ENGINEERS/HEAVY HIGHWAY: (Continued)
HEAVY HIGHWAY CLASS B:
All Air Compressors (over 900 cu. ft. per min.), Bituminous Mixer, Boom Type Tamping Machine, Bull Float, Concrete
Mixer (under 21 cu. ft.), Electric Vibrator Compactor/Self-Propelled Compactor, Elevator (one drum or buck hoist),
Elevator (regardless of ownership when used to hoist building material), Finish Machine, Firemen, Flex-Plane, Forklift
(regardless of lift height), Form Grader, Hoist (one drum), Joint Sealing Machine, Mechanic Helper, Outboard Motor Boat,
Power Sweeper (riding type), Roller (rock), Ross Carrier, Skid Mounted or Trailer Mounted Concrete Pumps, Switchman or
Brakeman, Throttle Valve Man, Tractair and Road Widening Trencher, Tractor (50 HP and over), Truck Crane Oiler,
Tugger, Welding Machine, Well Points, and Whirley Oiler:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$24.87
13.40
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$25.26
13.40
HEAVY HIGHWAY CLASS B2:
Greaser on Grease Facilities servicing Heavy Equipment:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
HEAVY HIGHWAY CLASS C:
Bituminous Distributor, Burlap and Curing Machine, Caisson Drill and Core Drill Helper (track or skid mounted), Cement
Gun, Concrete Saw, Conveyor, Deckhand Oiler, Grout Pump, Hydraulic Post Driver, Hydro Seeder, Mud Jack, Oiler, Paving
Joint Machine, Power Form Handling Equipment, Pump, Roller (earth), Steermen, Tamping Machine, Tractors (under 50
H.P.) and Vibrator:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$24.60
13.40
All Heavy Highway above: Employees assigned to work below ground level are to be paid ten percent (10%)
above base wage rate. This does not apply to open cut work.
PAINTERS:
BUILDING
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$14.00
0.00
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$17.30
3.80
PLASTERERS:
BASE RATE
$13.30
PLUMBERS/PIPEFITTERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$25.55
11.70
ROOFERS:
BASE RATE
$7.25
CR-7-018
October 2, 2012
CLASSIFICATIONS
SHEETMETAL WORKERS:(includes sheet metal roofs)
RATE AND FRINGE BENEFITS
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$25.91
8.06
7
SPRINKLER FITTERS:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$28.65
13.80
TRUCK DRIVERS/BUILDING:
Truckdrivers:
Truck helper& warehouseman:
BUILDING
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
$8.04
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.65
5.80
Driver, winch truck and A-Frame when used in transporting materials:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.75
5.80
Driver, (semi-trailer or pole trailer), driver (dump truck, tandem axle), driver of distributor:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.85
5.80
Driver on mixer trucks (all types): HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.90
5.80
Truck mechanic:
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.95
5.80
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$16.98
5.80
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$17.00
5.80
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$17.19
5.80
Driver, Euclid and other heavy earth moving equipment and Low Boy:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$17.76
5.80
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
Driver (3 tons and under), tire changer and truck mechanic helper:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
Driver on pavement breakers:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
Driver (over 3 tons), driver (truck mounted rotary drill):
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
Greaser on greasing facilities:
HEAVY & HIGHWAY
BASE RATE
FRINGE BENEFITS
$17.85
5.80
END OF DOCUMENT CR-7-018
OCTOBER 2, 2012
Page 9 of 9
8
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
INDEX TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
1.
DEFINITIONS
2.
GENERAL
3.
ARCHITECT'S WORK PRODUCT
4.
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5.
CONFLICTS
6.
WORKMANSHIP
7.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
8.
DIVISION OF SPECIFICATIONS
9.
ALLOCATION OF WORK
10. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF
11. CODES AND ORDINANCES
12. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, FINAL COMPLETION & SUBSEQUENT
REVIEWS
13. STORAGE OF MATERIALS
14. LAYOUT OF BUILDING
15. DAMAGED FACILITIES
16. UNIT PRICES
17. RULES OF MEASUREMENT
18. INTERRUPTION OF UTILITIES
19. CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 1
1. DEFINITIONS:
1a. The term "OWNER" as used throughout these documents means the: City of Albany, 204
Cross Street, Albany, KY 42602
1b. The term "ARCHITECT" as used throughout these documents means Sewell and Sewell
Architects PLLC, 6233 Old Nashville Road, Bowling Green, Kentucky 42104, (270) 904-3388.
1d. The terms "PLANS" and "DRAWINGS" are used interchangeably and are construed to have
the same meaning.
2. GENERAL:
2a. These specifications and drawings accompanying them describe the work to be done and the
materials to be furnished for the Albany Fire Station.
2b. Should any error or inconsistency appear in the Drawings or Specifications, the Contractor,
before proceeding with the work, must make mention of the same to the Architect for proper
adjustment and in no case proceed with the work in uncertainty or with insufficient drawings.
2c. The work under this contract does not include any items marked N.I.C. on the drawings (not
in contract).
2d. Contractors shall follow sizes in specifications or figures on drawings, in preference to scale
measurements and follow detail drawings in preference to general drawings.
2e. Where it is obvious that a drawing illustrates only a part of a given work or of a number of
items, the remainder shall be deemed repetitious and so constructed.
3. ARCHITECT'S WORK PRODUCT:
3a. The Architect's work product is prepared and produced for the sole and exclusive benefit of
the Owner. Any real or inferred benefits to third parties is hereby expressly disclaimed.
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT:
4a. The Architect will perform certain administrative functions of the construction contract.
Nothing contained in these contract documents, not any other oral or written agreements,
memoranda, or communications shall create any express or implied contractual relationship
between the Architect and the Contractor.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 2
4b. The Architect may make periodic visits to the work site in accordance with the conditions
of his contract with the Owner. The purpose of these visits and observations is to endeavor to
guard against defects and deficiencies, not to supervise the Contractor's work.
4c. The Architect makes no express or implied representations of guaranteeing the Contractor's
work.
4d. The Architect is not a specialist in construction methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures and therefore assumes no responsibility for the construction operations and safety
program.
5. CONFLICTS:
5a. If there is any conflict in the General Conditions with the Special Conditions, the Special
Conditions shall govern.
5b. The Kentucky Fairness in Construction Act, KRS 371.400 to 371.990, applies to this
construction contract, and where there is a conflict between terms and conditions of these
contract documents and the provisions of the Kentucky Fairness in Construction Act, the latter
shall prevail.
6. WORKMANSHIP:
6a. The Workmanship shall be of the highest quality, in every respect, as usually recognized in
the building industry. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the Architect, Engineers,
or inspecting authorities) is to be removed and replaced to conform to the highest quality
standards of the trades concerned, or otherwise corrected.
7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
7a. The drawing dimensions shall have precedence over scaled measurements and details over
general drawings. In case of conflicts between Drawings and Specifications, the more stringent
shall apply.
7b. Figured dimensions on the drawings are reasonably accurate and should govern in setting out
the work. However, should the Contractor discover discrepancies or inaccuracies, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to bring them to the attention of the Architect before making any
changes. Changes shall be made only with the approval of the Architect.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 3
8. DIVISION OF SPECIFICATIONS:
8a. Division of Specifications into sections is done for convenience of reference and is not
intended to control contractors in dividing work among subcontractors or to limit scope of work
performed by any trade under any given section.
9. ALLOCATION OF WORK:
9a. Where certain materials are specified to be installed under various headings, it shall be the
responsibility of the General Contractor to re-allocate such work under the proper subcontractor
if the specification is in conflict with local jurisdiction.
10. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF:
10a. Any notice to any Contractor from the Owner relative to any part of this contract shall be in
writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when said notice is posted,
by registered mail, to the said Contractor at his last address, or delivered in person to said
Contractor or his authorized representative on the work.
11. CODES AND ORDINANCES:
11a. All branches of the work shown on the plans or specified, whether specifically mentioned
or not, shall be executed in strict compliance with all local or state regulations and codes, and
shall be in compliance with all National Codes, when same have jurisdiction.
12. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, FINAL COMPLETION & SUBSEQUENT
REVIEWS:
12a. In as much as all parties with and intend to prosecute the work in a diligent and good faith
manner, and to complete the work in a timely fashion, the Contractor shall notify the Architect
when the Contractor believes he has attained Substantial Completion. Notification shall be made
at least five (5) calendar days prior to the date set to the Substantial Completion review. The
Contractor shall comply with the prerequisite requirements for Substantial Completion as set
forth in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
12b. Review Procedures. Upon receipt of the Contractor's request, the Architect will either
proceed with review or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial review,
the Architect will either prepare a certificate of substantial completion, or advise the Contractor
of work which must be performed prior to issuance of the certificate of substantial completion.
The Architect will repeat the review when requested and assured by the Contractor, in writing,
that the Work has been substantially completed. Results of the completed review will form the
initial "punch list" for final acceptance.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 4
12c. The Architect will review the work upon the receipt of the Contractor's notice that he
believes in good faith that, except for those items whose completion has been delayed due to
circumstances that are acceptable to the Architect, the work has been completed, including punch
list items from earlier reviews. Upon completion of review, the Architect will either recommend
final acceptance and final payment, or will advise the Contractor of work not completed or
obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance by issuance of another punch list.
12d. The Contractor, upon completion of all outstanding items set forth on the punch list, shall
notify the Architect of the completion of the work. The Architect shall verify completion of the
work by an on-site review.
12e. In the event that the work should still require further reviews after initial post final review,
unless through no fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall authorize the Owner to deduct
from the remaining available construction funds those monies which represent the Architect's
normal hourly compensation rates and normal expenses for any additional time and expense
expended on this project by the Architect. Hourly rates and expense reimbursement rates will be
governed by those rates stipulated in the agreement between the Owner and the Architect. The
disbursement of available construction funds by the Owner to the Architect in the aforegoing
situation, described herein, shall represent only actual charges associated with the expenditure of
the Architect's time and expense and in no way represent a penalty assessed to the Contractor.
13. STORAGE OF MATERIALS:
13a. Each Contractor providing materials and equipment shall be responsible for the proper and
adequate storage of his materials and equipment, and for the removal of same upon completion
of his work. Storage of materials at the site shall be confined to areas within the Contract Limits,
and the Contractor's designated parking area if necessary, where designated by the Architect.
14. LAYOUT:
14a. The General Contractor shall lay out the work and be responsible for all lines, levels and
measurements of all work executed under this Contract; he shall verify the figures before laying
out the work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to do so.
14b. The General Contractor shall be prepared to guarantee each of his subcontractors the
dimensions which they may require for the layout and fitting of their work to adjacent work.
15. DAMAGED FACILITIES:
15a. The General Contractor shall repair and/or replace, at no expense to the Owner, any
sections of existing roads, drives, streets, sidewalks, curbs, utilities, buildings and other
structures damaged by reason of work performed under this Contract or incidental thereto,
whether by his own forces or by his subcontractors or by his material suppliers.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 5
16. UNIT PRICES:
16a. The Unit Price for each of the items set forth in the Form of Proposal shall become a part of
the Contract.
16b. All Unit Prices are subject to review by the Owner and Architect prior to being accepted for
contract purposes.
16c. All subcontractors shall be bound by the Unit Prices of the General Contractor.
16d. It is mutually understood and agreed that such Unit Prices include all items of cost,
overhead and profit for the Contractor and any subcontractor(s) involved, and that they shall be
used uniformly without modification for either additions or deductions.
16e. The Rules of Measurement, as specified in Paragraph 17 of this Section, shall apply in the
use of Unit Prices.
16e1. Each Unit Price involving earthwork shall cover, among other things, engineering
(surveying) costs and all costs of keeping excavations dry.
17. RULES OF MEASUREMENT:
17a. The following Rules of Measurement shall apply in the use of Unit Prices:
17a1. Except as provision is made hereinafter for arbitrary measurements, the quantity of
excavation shall be its in-place volume before removal.
17a2. No allowance will be made for excavating additional material of any nature taken out for
the convenience of the Contractor, beyond the quantity computed under these Rules of
Measurement.
17a3. The quantities of excavation shall be computed from instrument readings in vertical cross
sections located at such intervals as will assure accuracy.
17a4. General excavation for buildings and sections of buildings, bases for equipment, sump
pits, etc., involving an area of 200 or more square feet, shall be classified as "Mass Excavation".
17a5. Excavation for pipes, wall footings, grade beams, column footings, and sections of
buildings such as bases for equipment, sump pits, etc., involving an area of 200 or more square
feet, shall be classified as "Mass Excavation".
17a6. "Mass Excavation" shall arbitrarily be assumed to extend to vertical planes two (2) feet
outside wall lines, and to the elevation of plan subgrade.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 6
17a7. "Trench Excavation" for walls, grade beams, and sections of building, such as bases for
equipment, sump pits, etc., involving an area less than 200 square feet shall be arbitrarily
assumed to extend 2 feet wider than wall and grade beam thicknesses and outside walls of
sections of buildings such as bases for equipment, sump pit, etc., but in no case less than three (3)
feet wide sides vertical.
17a8. "Trench Excavation" for pipes shall arbitrarily be assumed to be two (2) feet wider than
the outside diameter of the pipe barrel and with sides vertical.
17a9. "Trench Excavation" for wall footings and column footings shall be computed as vertical
shafts, each with a horizontal cross section identical in shape and size with the plan of the
footing.
17a10. The quantities of form work will be the area of forms in contact with concrete.
17a11. Concrete quantities shall be computed from plan size or if there are no drawings, from
actual measurement of the work ordered and placed, waste excluded.
18. INTERRUPTION OF UTILITIES:
18a. Utility services to existing facilities shall not be interrupted unless absolutely necessary.
Interruptions shall be of minimum duration and shall be scheduled to cause the least possible
inconvenience. In all cases, the Owner shall be notified well in advance of an anticipated
interruption of utilities.
19. CONTRACTOR COORDINATION:
19a. The General Contractor and all subcontractors and other on-site contractors shall cooperate
and coordinate their work to expedite the progress of the project. All subcontractors shall review
and refer to the drawings and specifications of other trades involved with their particular work
before proceeding. Any work installed which conflicts with another trade and had not been
brought to the attention of the Architect prior to installation shall be removed at no additional
expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION SC
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SC - 7
Temporary Black & White Construction Sign for projects funded by the
Department for Local Government (DLG)
Steven L. Beshear
Governor
Tony Wilder
Commissioner
Office of the Governor
Department for Local Government
ALBANY FIRE STATION
Project Sponsor: City of Albany
204 Cross Street, Albany, KY
Architect: Sewell and Sewell Architects
Civil Engineer: Arnold Consulting Engineering Services
Contractor:
This project is funded by a Community
Development Block Grant administered by the
Department for Local Government and
financed by the U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development.
Equal Opportunity Employer
Sign Dimensions: 1200mm x 2400mm x 19 mm (app. 4’ x 8’ x ¾”) Plywood Panel (APA Rated A-B grade – Exterior)
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Project consists of the New Fire Station for the City of Albany and related site work
and utilities.
B.
Contract Documents, dated July 31, 2013 were prepared for the Project by Sewell and
Sewell Architects PLLC, Bowling Green, Kentucky 42104, (270) 904-3388.
C.
Briefly and without effect on the Contract Documents, the work of the Contract can be
summarized as follows:
1.
D.
1.3
A.
New Fire Station for the City of Albany with related site and utilities work.
The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The following regulations are applicable to this project:
1.
2.
Kentucky Building Code, Current Edition.
The Americans with Disabilities Act - 1991.
B.
Other regulations may also be applicable.
C.
Obtain copies of the regulations listed above and keep at the project site for the use of
all parties.
D.
Submit copies of all permits, licenses and similar permissions obtained and receipts for
fees paid to the Owner directly. Provide one copy of each to Architect’s office for job
closeout record.
1.4
A.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the
premises for construction operations as indicated in phasing plan including use of the
site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 1
perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project.
B.
Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine
operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site
beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises
clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles
at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule
deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and
equipment on-site.
Storage areas will be available on site.
Signs: Provide signs adequate to direct visitors.
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Do not install, or allow to be installed, signs other than specified sign(s) and
signs identifying the principal entities involved in the project.
Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine
stockpiling of materials and location of storage sheds to areas approved by the
Owner.
Lock automotive type vehicles, such as passenger cars, trucks and other
mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended,
so as to prevent unauthorized use. Do not leave such vehicles or equipment
unattended with the motor running or the ignition key in place.
All workmen, while on the job site, shall wear identification tag.
Materials deliveries will need to be coordinated so as not to disrupt or cause any
safety problems while school is in session.
All workmen while on job site shall wear shirts.
No alcohol, smoking, drug use, firearms, foul language, fraternization with
students or staff shall be permitted and shall result in immediate dismissal.
Employment of workers convicted of felony sex crimes is prohibited.
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall maintain daily, a safe and clean job site.
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010 - 2
SECTION 01026 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
DEFINITIONS
Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit
of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum
by appropriate modification, if the estimated quantities of Work required by the
Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices represent work-in-place costs and include all necessary material, plus cost
for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes.
B.
Measurement and Payment: Refer to the Form of Proposal for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are
specified in the Special Conditions and Form of Proposal.
C.
The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-in-place
that involves use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured, at the
Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01026
UNIT PRICES
01026 - 1
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.
B.
Related Sections:
Section.
1.
1.3
A.
Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the
Contractor's Construction Schedule, Submittal Schedule, and List of Subcontracts.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Schedules: The Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are
specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals."
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative
schedules and forms, including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Application for Payment forms, including Continuation Sheets.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of allowances.
Schedule of alternates.
List of products.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
Schedule of submittals.
Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest possible date but no
later than 10 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial
Applications for Payment. The initial Application for Payment will not be
processed until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the Architect.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 1
B.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish
the format for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each
Specification Section. Provide under each Specification Section separate lines for
materials and labor.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of
Values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Project name and location.
Name of the Architect.
Project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
1)
3.
4.
5.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate
continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports.
Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Break principal subcontract
amounts down into several line items.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment, purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
6.
Percentage of Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent,
adjusted to total 100 percent.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
requirements for insurance and bonded warehousing, if required.
Provide separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the
materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of
that part of the Work.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 2
7.
8.
Unit-Cost Allowances: Show the line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a
product of the unit cost, multiplied by the measured quantity. Estimate quantities
from the best indication in the Contract Documents.
Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs and margins on actual costs
only when such items are listed individually in Applications for Payment. Each
item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include the total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit
margin for each item.
a.
9.
1.4
A.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at the
Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner.
1.
The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of
Substantial Completion, and the final Application for Payment involve additional
requirements.
B.
Payment-Application Times:
Each progress-payment date is indicated in the
Agreement. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment
is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment-Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703
as the form for Applications for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include notarization and
execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor.
The Architect will return incomplete applications without action.
1.
2.
E.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders approved by Owner and Construction Change
Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the
application.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 3
Payment to the Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall
be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.
1.
F.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the
Architect.
Waivers of Mechanics Lien: Submit with Application for Payment, waivers of
mechanics liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the
construction period as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction
for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
The Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work
must submit waivers.
a.
4.
G.
Submit final Applications for Payment with or preceded by final waivers
from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the
application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on the latest edition of the Affidavit form
required by the Department of Facilities Management of the Commonwealth of
Kentucky and executed in a manner, acceptable to the Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals, that must
precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment, include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
List of subcontractors.
List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
Approved Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Progress schedule.
Schedule of principal products.
Quality control activities schedule.
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance
of the Work.
Initial progress report.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 4
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
H.
Report of preconstruction meeting to include meeting minutes.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
All submittals specified to occur prior to first application for payment or prior to
first payment.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire the Owner's insurance.
Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the
Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment.
1.
Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this
application include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
I.
Occupancy permits and similar approvals including Life Safety certificates.
Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
Test/adjust/balance records.
Maintenance instructions.
Meter readings.
Startup performance reports.
Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Final cleaning.
Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.
Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
Final progress photographs where photographs are required.
List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate
of Substantial Completion.
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Completion of Project closeout requirements.
Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.
Ensure that unsettled claims will be settled.
Ensure that incomplete Work which is not accepted will be completed without
undue delay.
Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Owner.
Certified property survey (if applicable).
Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Removal of temporary facilities and services.
Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements.
Change of door locks to Owner's access.
Signed certificate by Owner, noting receipt of all surplus materials as indicated in
the specifications.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027 - 6
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
DEFINITIONS
Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form
for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted
from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in
either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials,
equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
A.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the
Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments
are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and
fully integrate that Work into the Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not
mentioned as part of the Alternate. Costs listed on Bid Form for each alternate
shall include costs of related coordination, modification or adjustment.
B.
Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party
involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have
been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete
description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
D.
Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section.
Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials
necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate.
ALTERNATES
01030 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A.
Refer to Drawings Sheet A0.1 “Alternates”.
END OF SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
01030 - 2
SECTION 01035 - MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.
SUMMARY
This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices.
Division 1 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Division 1 Section "Application for Payment" for administrative procedures governing
applications for payment.
Division 1 Section "Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for
substitutions made after award of the Contract.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment
to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect on AIA form G710,
Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment
to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description
of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary.
Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only and shall not be considered an
instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.
Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20 days of receipt of the proposal
request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review an estimate of cost including a complete
breakdown of labor, materials and time necessary to execute the proposed change. Contractor's
proposals that do not show complete labor and material breakdowns will not be acceptable.
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035 - 1
Indicate the labor required in the form of Hours x Rate Per Hour = Labor Amount for Each Item.
Include a list of materials and quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with
the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the
Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforeseen
conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by
submitting a request for a change to the Architect.
Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
Indicate the labor required in the form of Hours x Rate Per Hour = Labor Amount for Each Item.
Include a list of materials and quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the
total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate
quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change in the Work
requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA document G709 for Change Order proposal requests.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on
the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change
Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,
for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the
Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035 - 2
After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a
Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in the
Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01035
MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035 - 3
SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for
coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Cleaning and protection.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination
meetings, and preinstallation conferences.
Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general
installation.
Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
COORDINATION
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications
to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for
proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best
results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility
for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
COORDINATION
01040 - 1
B.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining
special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,
reports, and attendance at meetings.
1.
C.
Administrative Procedures:
Coordinate scheduling and timing of required
administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure
orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
A.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated in, the Work.
SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is
needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare
coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum
utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Preparation of schedules.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried
out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.4
Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where
coordination of their work is required.
Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals."
Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a
list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and
other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties
and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.
1.
Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and
each temporary telephone.
COORDINATION
01040 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A.
Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both
the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the
necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
3.2
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during
handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection
from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to assure operability without damaging effects.
C.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
END OF SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
01040 - 3
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Preconstruction conferences.
Preinstallation conferences.
Progress meetings.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project
meetings with other construction activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittals" for submitting the Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Schedule a preconstruction conference and organizational meeting before starting
construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the Architect, but no later than 15
days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or
another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and
personnel assignments.
B.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
the Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers;
and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the
conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating
to the Work.
C.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including such topics
as:
1.
2.
Establish line(s) of communication.
Tentative construction schedule.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 1
3
4
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.4
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
Safety procedures.
First aid.
Security.
Housekeeping.
Working hours.
PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A.
Conduct a preinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity
that requires coordination with other construction.
B.
Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved
in or affected by the installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials
and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise the
Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
1.
Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration at each preinstallation conference,
including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality-control samples.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's recommendations.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities.
Space and access limitations.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 2
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
2.
3.
1.5
Governing regulations.
Safety.
Inspecting and testing requirements.
Required performance results.
Recording requirements.
Protection.
Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each
conference, and the approved schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the
meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the Architect.
Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Conduct progress meetings at the Project Site at regularly scheduled intervals. Notify
the Owner and the Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Coordinate dates of meetings
with preparation of the payment request.
B.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each
subcontractor, supplier, or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
C.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.
1.
2.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine where each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction
Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
a.
b.
Interface requirements.
Time.
c.
Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule and corrective
actions taken of or proposed.
Sequences.
d.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 3
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
D.
Status of submittals and impending submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication problems and delivery schedules.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and services.
Hours of work.
Hazards and risks.
Housekeeping.
Acutal and potential difficulties.
Quality and work standards.
Effect of proposed changes on schedule and coordination.
Change Orders.
Status of corrective work ordered by the Architect.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Progress expected to be made during the next period.
Reporting: No later than 5 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to
each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief
summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.
1.
Schedule Updating: Revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue the revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200 - 4
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals
required for performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 Sections and other Contract
Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Submittal schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
Agency submittals.
Seismic testing.
Permits.
Applications for Payment.
Performance and payment bonds.
Insurance certificates.
List of subcontractors.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" specifies requirements for
submittal of the Schedule of Values.
Division 1 Section "Coordination" specifies requirements governing preparation
and submittal of required Coordination Drawings.
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings" specifies requirements for submittal and
distribution of meeting and conference minutes.
Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies requirements for submittal of
Project Record Documents and warranties at project closeout.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 1
1.3
A.
DEFINITIONS
Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction
elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the
space provided or to function as intended.
1.
Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section
"Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop
Drawings or Product Data.
B.
Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,
coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which
the Work will be judged.
C.
Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction, coordination, testing, or
operation; they are not Samples.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance
of related construction activities to avoid delay.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a.
3.
The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received.
Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required
to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time
for resubmittals.
a.
b.
c.
d.
SUBMITTALS
Allow 2 weeks for initial review. Allow additional time if the Architect
must delay processing to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial
submittal.
Allow 2 weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to
transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to
permit processing.
01300 - 2
B.
Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for
identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label
or title block.
1.
2.
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or
beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and
approval markings and the action taken.
Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action
taken.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
C.
Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using a
transmittal form, indicate on the transmittal the corresponding specification section
number and a brief description of the submittal enclosed. The Architect will not accept
submittals received from sources other than the Contractor.
1.
2.
1.5
A.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of the Architect.
Name and address of the Contractor.
Name and address of the subcontractor.
Name and address of the supplier.
Name of the manufacturer.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
On the transmittal, record relevant information and requests for data. On the
form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that
information complies with Contract Document requirements.
Transmittal Form: Use Contractor's standard transmittal form.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's
construction schedule. Submit within 10 days after the date established for
"Commencement of the Work."
1.
2.
3.
Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a
continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the
same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
Within each time bar, indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent
increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate
Actual Completion.
Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 3
4.
5.
6.
reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction
period.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other
construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the
Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically the sequences
necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
Coordinate the Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values,
list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and
other schedules.
Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion.
Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's
procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
B.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including submittal review, testing, and installation.
C.
Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area
for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be
sequenced or integrated with other activities.
D.
Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating
planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of Work performed as of the
dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1.
E.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to
the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office.
1.
F.
1.6
A.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Applications for Payment" for cost reporting and
payment procedures.
When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting, event, or activity where
revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with
the report of each meeting.
SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
After development and acceptance of the Contractor's Construction Schedule, prepare a
complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date
required for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 4
1.
2.
Coordinate Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values,
and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to
the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with
submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1.
C.
1.7
A.
Scheduled date for the first submittal.
Related Section number.
Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples).
Name of the subcontractor.
Description of the part of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for resubmittal.
Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval.
When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same
locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report
of each meeting.
DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning
events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals if
requested:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
List of subcontractors at the site.
Approximate count of personnel at the site.
High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
Accidents and unusual events.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of governing authorities.
Change Orders received, implemented.
Services connected, disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions, occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 5
1.8
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or
otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard
information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.
B.
Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams,
schedules, patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
1.9
A.
Dimensions.
Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no
larger than 30 by 42 inches (742 by 1068 mm).
Initial Submittal: Submit blue- or black-line prints for the Architect's review.
The Architect will return the reproducible print.
Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action
taken.
Submit a minimum of six copies of each shop drawing, except mechanical, electrical
and plumbing which require a minimum of seven copies. Provide additional copies as
required by other parties. Total number of shop drawings required to be determined at
the pre-construction meeting.
PRODUCT DATA
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.
Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation
instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates,
standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1.
Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product
Data includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies
to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
SUBMITTALS
Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
Compliance with trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
01300 - 6
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.
Preliminary Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of Product Data where
selection of options is required.
Submittals: Submit 6 copies of each required submittal; submit 8 copies where
required for maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one and will return
the other marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required.
a.
5.
b.
A.
1.11
A.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors,
suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
a.
1.10
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Do not proceed with installation until a copy of Product Data is in the
Installer's possession.
Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with
construction.
WARRANTIES
Submit copies of all required warranties with shop drawing submittals. Warranties
which do not comply with specifications may be rejected.
SAMPLES
Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically
identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of
manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets,
and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
1.
Mount or display Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated.
Prepare Samples to match the Architect's sample. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
SUBMITTALS
Specification Section number and reference.
Generic description of the Sample.
Sample source.
Product name or name of the manufacturer.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability and delivery time.
01300 - 7
2.
Submit Samples for review of size, kind, color, pattern, and texture. Submit
Samples for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and a
comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual
component as delivered and installed.
a.
b.
c.
Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent
in the material or product represented, submit at least 3 multiple units that
show approximate limits of the variations.
Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that
illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly,
connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.
Refer to other Sections for Samples to be returned to the Contractor for
incorporation in the Work. Such Samples must be undamaged at time of
use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of
Sample submittals.
3. Preliminary Submittals: Submit a full set of choices where Samples are submitted
for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a range of
standard choices.
a.
4.
5.
Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and similar characteristics, submit
3 sets. The Architect will return one set marked with the action taken.
Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project Site, for quality comparisons
throughout the course of construction.
a.
b.
B.
The Architect will review and return preliminary submittals with the
Architect's notation, indicating selection and other action.
Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the
submittal may serve as the final submittal.
Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction
associated with each set.
Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors,
manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance
of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.
Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings,
or finish materials and to establish the Project standard.
a.
SUBMITTALS
Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process
transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.
01300 - 8
1.12
A.
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is required,
the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return
promptly.
1.
B.
Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, action stamp.
The Architect will mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the action taken, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Final Unrestricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN", "Accepted", "Approved," the Work covered by the
submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract
Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance.
Final-But-Restricted Release: When the Architect marks a submittal "NOTE
MARKINGS", "Accepted as Noted", "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by
the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on
the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment
depends on that compliance.
Returned for Resubmittal: When the Architect marks a submittal "REJECTED",
"Not Accepted, Resubmit", "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not
proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,
delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the
notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action
mark.
a.
4.
C.
Do not use, or allow others to use, submittals marked "REJECTED", "Not
Accepted, Resubmit", "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" at the Project
Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
Other Action: Where a submittal is for information or record purposes or special
processing or other activity, the Architect will return the submittal marked "NO
EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "Action Not Required."
Unsolicited Submittals: The Architect will return unsolicited submittals to the sender
without action.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
01300 - 9
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control
services.
B.
Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports
performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They
do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation
procedures, not production of standard products.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's qualitycontrol procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by
Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions
of this Section.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and
restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a
schedule of required tests and inspections.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 1
1.3
A.
RESPONSIBILITIES
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another
identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control
services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
1.
2.
Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality-control services are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor
shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform qualitycontrol services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and
other quality-control services are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will
employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services.
a.
B.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests,
or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with
Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was
Contractor's responsibility.
1.
C.
Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency for testing and inspecting
part of the Work, and the Contractor is also required to engage an entity for
the same or related element, the Contractor shall not employ the entity
engaged by the Owner, unless agreed to in writing by the Owner.
The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the
Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction
indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests,
and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide access to the Work.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require
testing or assist the agency in taking samples.
Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials
mixes that require control by the testing agency.
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 2
D.
Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections,
sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall
cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties.
The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and
tests.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services
with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.
1.4
The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities
or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking
samples, and similar activities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall submit a plan, in writing, from the testing agency, stating how they
intend to perform these services of special inspections stated above and submit to the
Building Inspectors office as required by 1705.0 of the 2002 K.B.C. The testing agency
shall submit reports to the Architect for approval during construction.
B.
Unless the Contractor is responsible for this service, the independent testing agency
shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar
service to the Architect. If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service through
the Contractor.
1.
2.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority,
when the authority so directs.
Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
Designation of the Work and test method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete inspection or test data.
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 3
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
1.5
E.
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work
complies with Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies,
including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the
American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for
Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections
and tests to be performed.
1.
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be
authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the
Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
E.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract
Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
F.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities, and protect
repaired construction.
G.
Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
01400 - 4
SECTION 01420 – STRUCTURAL TESTING / INSPECTION AGENCY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
1.2
Section summarizes the responsibility of the Contractor and the Structural Testing /
Inspection Agency in the performance of the Special Inspections.
Neither the observation of the Architect / Structural Engineer in the administration of
the contract, nor tests/ inspections by the Testing / Inspection Agency, nor approvals by
persons other than the Architect / Structural Engineer shall relieve the Contractor from
his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Division 1 Sections
REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
1.4
ASTM D3740 – Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and / or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
ASTM E329 – Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for
Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
American Council of Independent Laboratories – Recommended Requirements
for Independent Laboratories Qualifications.
SELECTION AND PAYMENT
A.
B.
C.
1.5
The Owner shall employ and pay for the structural testing / inspection services that are
required by the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall also pay for any additional structural testing / inspection required for
work or materials not complying with Contract Documents due to negligence or
nonconformance.
Contractor shall pay for any additional structural testing / inspection required for
convenience.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Prior to start of work, submit name of Structural Testing / Inspection Agency, address,
telephone number, fax number, and names and qualifications of technicians, inspectors,
and engineers who will be working on this project.
If multiple Structural Testing / Inspection Agencies are used, submit the information
stated above for each firm along with a statement of the testing / inspection
responsibilities for each firm.
STRUCTURAL TESTING / INSPECTION AGENCY
01420 - 1
1.6
TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
B.
C.
1.7
Tests and inspections of materials and work performed will be required as set forth in
the appropriate sections of these specifications and as noted on the drawings. The
Testing and Inspection, and the reporting and / or certification of the Testing and
Inspection, shall comply with the requirements of the Building Code.
Refer to the Structural Drawings and Cover Sheet for specific types of work that require
inspection. A qualified inspector shall observe the work for conformance with the
approved Contract Documents. Inspections shall be in accordance with Chapter 17 of
the Kentucky Building Code.
The inspector(s) for work requiring inspection shall be a qualified person(s) who shall
demonstrate competence to the local building authority for inspection of the particular
type of construction or work requiring inspection.
STRUCTURAL QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
A.
B.
Specific structural testing / inspection requirements are given in the Structural
Drawings, Specifications and Cover Sheet.
Special Inspector shall comply with Chapter 17 of the Kentucky Building Code, 2013
edition in the performance and documentation of the Special Inspections.
PART 2 – MATERIALS
Not used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
STRUCTURAL PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
A structural preconstruction meeting may be conducted at the construction site by the
Structural Engineer to discuss the quality issues. The parties involved may be the
Architect, Contractor, Structural Testing / Inspection Agency, appropriate
subcontractors, suppliers and detailers.
STRUCTURAL TESTING / INSPECTION AGENCY’S RESPONSIBILITIES
Cooperate with the Contractor and provide timely service.
Upon arriving at the construction site, sign in and notify the Contractor of presence.
Select the representative samples that are to be tested / inspected.
Perform tests / inspections as outlined in Contract Documents, the applicable codes, and
as directed by the Structural Engineer.
Report work and materials not complying with Contract Documents immediately to the
Contractor and Structural Engineer.
Leave copies of field notes with the Contractor prior to leaving the construction site.
Field notes shall include the message given to the Contractor, date, time of message,
STRUCTURAL TESTING / INSPECTION AGENCY
01420 - 2
G.
H.
I.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
3.4
A.
name of Contractor’s representative informed, type and location of work or materials
tested / inspected, whether the work or materials complies with Contract Documents
and name of the Structural Testing / Inspection Agency’s representative.
Report and distribute results of tests / inspections promptly in the form of written
reports as directed by the Structural Engineer.
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency shall not alter requirements of Contract
Documents, approve or reject any portion of the work, or perform duties of the
Contractor.
Submit written confirmation at end of construction that, to the best of their knowledge,
the structural work conforms to the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
Provide copy of Contract Documents to the Structural Testing / Inspection Agency.
Arrange the preconstruction meeting to discuss quality issues.
Notify the Structural Testing / Inspection Agency sufficiently in advance of operations
to allow assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
Cooperate with Structural Testing / Inspection Agency and provide access to work.
Provide samples of materials to be tested in required quantities.
Furnish copies of mill test reports when requested.
Provide storage space for Structural Testing / Inspection Agency’s exclusive use, such
as for storing and curing concrete testing samples.
Provide labor to assist the Structural Testing / Inspection Agency in perfoming tests /
inspections.
OPTIONS
If the Structural Testing / Inspection Agency is located at such a distance from the
project that travel expenses will be a consideration, or if the amount of sampling
performed is minor, and by mutual agreement of the Architect / Structural Engineer and
Contractor, the Contractor may be requested to take samples and forward them to the
Structural Testing / Inspection Agency for testing / inspection.
END OF SECTION 01420
STRUCTURAL TESTING / INSPECTION AGENCY
01420 - 3
SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls,
including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
B.
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Water service and distribution.
Temporary electric power and light.
Temporary heat.
Ventilation.
Telephone service.
Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
Storm and sanitary sewer.
Field offices and storage sheds.
Temporary roads and paving.
Dewatering facilities and drains.
Temporary enclosures.
Hoists and temporary elevator use.
Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
Waste disposal services.
Rodent and pest control.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
Job sign.
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Temporary fire protection.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Environmental protection.
Temporary chainlink safety fencing.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B.
Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for
commencement of the Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and
termination of each temporary utility.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Standards:
Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,
Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety
Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library
"Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1.
C.
1.5
Building code requirements including local requirements for permits, testing and
inspection.
Health and safety regulations.
Utility company regulations and recommendations.
Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules.
Environmental protection regulations governing use of water and energy and the
control of fumes, dust noise and other nuisances.
Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and
regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with
NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and
termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to
the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.
B.
Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance.
Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the
Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress.
Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use
undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials
suitable for use intended.
B.
Lumber and Plywood:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.2
For job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds within the construction area,
provide UL-labeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing, and
siding.
For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density
concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
For fences and vision barriers, provide minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick
exterior plywood.
For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8inch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood.
Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) thick, galvanized 2-inch (50-mm)
chainlink fabric fencing 6 feet (2 m) high with galvanized barbed-wire top strand and
galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches
(64 mm) I.D. for corner posts.
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may
use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide
equipment suitable for use intended.
B.
Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch (19-mm), heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber
hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of
the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
C.
Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent
insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle
outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for
connection of power tools and equipment.
D.
Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords
where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect
separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where
construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 3
E.
Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage
required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures
where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
F.
Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by
UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being
consumed.
G.
Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built
construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes.
Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading.
H.
Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the
chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and
fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent
material.
I.
Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers
for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried,
portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.
1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and
size required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where
they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with
performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by
authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
A.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or
connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide
the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with
company recommendations.
1.
Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 4
2.
3.
4.
B.
Water Service: The Owner will pay for water usage. The Contractor shall be
responsible for water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for
construction until permanent water service is in use.
1.
C.
Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
Temporary Electric Power Service: The Owner will pay for electric power for the
Contractor’s use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following as required.
Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include
meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault
interrupters, and main distribution switch gear.
1.
2.
3.
D.
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility
availability, provide trucked-in services.
Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's
easements cannot be used for that purpose.
Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to
the Owner or Architect. Neither the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use
charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders.
Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be
used.
Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least
exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac
20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where
overhead and exposed for surveillance.
Wire temporary lighting as required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching.
1.
Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection
requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that
will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic
conditions as determined by Architect.
E.
Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing
or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will
not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and
minimize consumption of energy.
F.
Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system,
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 5
provide vented, self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1.
G.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is
prohibited.
Temporary Telephones:
Provide temporary telephone service throughout the
construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install
telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station.
a.
1.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
H.
Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials
for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.
Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pittype privies will not be permitted.
1.
J.
Local police and fire department.
Doctor.
Ambulance.
Contractor's temporary and home office.
Architect's office.
Engineer's office.
Owner's office.
Major subcontractor's temporary and home office.
Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures.
Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and
maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the
Project's needs.
1.
I.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for a fax machine in the field office
(Contractor's option).
Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient
locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy
and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds
appropriate for each condition.
1.
Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for safety, and
sanitation of personnel as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 6
K.
Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinkingwater units, including paper supply.
1.
Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed
water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7 to 13 deg C).
L.
Provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a legal manner.
M.
Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and
subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from
heavy rains.
3.3
A.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support
facilities for easy access.
1.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to
Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will
be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the
Owner.
B.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within the
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with requirements
of NFPA 241.
C.
Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and
orderly for use for small progress meetings.
D.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished,
and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary
utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building
or elsewhere on-site.
E.
Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the
indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction
period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same
permanent facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent
paving with the Architect.
1.
2.
Paving: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot-Mixed Asphalt Paving" for
construction and maintenance of temporary paving.
Coordinate temporary paving development with subgrade grading, compaction,
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 7
3.
4.
5.
installation and stabilization of subbase, and installation of base and finish courses
of permanent paving.
Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to
result in permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when
occupied by the Owner.
Delay installation of the final course of permanent asphalt concrete paving until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Coordinate with weather conditions
to avoid unsatisfactory results.
Extend temporary paving in and around the construction area as necessary to
accommodate delivery and storage of materials, equipment usage, administration,
and supervision.
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and
operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual
Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections.
Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and
construction free of water.
G.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other
signs of size indicated. Install signs where directed to inform the public and persons
seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated
wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete,
provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of
heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing
requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials.
Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials.
Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with loadbearing, wood-framed construction.
Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply
graphics.
Temporary Signs:
Prepare signs to provide directional information to
construction personnel and visitors.
Job Sign: Install job sign at location chosen by Owner.
Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights so signs are visible
when Work is being performed.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 8
J.
Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere
daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste
material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7
days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80
deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials
separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
K.
Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a
local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize
attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to
perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be
free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations
lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
L.
Stairs: Provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over
from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until
Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect.
B.
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent
facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable
stairwell.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit
smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating
units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
C.
Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project,
complete installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected
services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
D.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements
for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics,
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 9
and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected
against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or
amber lights.
E.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially
completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized
entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
1.
2.
Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or
attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with
the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and
vandalism.
Off-site storage of materials for temporary storage purposes shall be contained
within fully bonded warehouse facilities and be fully insured as required.
F.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and
minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or
polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and
equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and
equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site.
G.
Contractor has option to provide temporary chainlink fence around active construction
building site. Temporary fencing shall consist of 6’ high chainlink fencing with support
poles at 10’ on center set in gravel filled post holes. Contractor to install gates with
locks as required at locations to be determined by Contractor. The Contractor may
utilize used fencing materials for this temporary safety fence. Unless the Architect
requests that fencing be maintained longer, the Contractor shall remove temporary
fencing when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of permanent
facility, or no later than substantial completion. Materials that constitute temporary
fencing are the Contractor’s property and shall remain the Contractor’s property after
removal of such fencing.
3.5
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability
of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect
from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2.
Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for
underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 10
C.
Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer,
remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized
use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if
necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces,
and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's
property. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of project identification
signs.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into
permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development,
remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or
subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and
other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of
plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at
the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
the construction period including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b.
Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating
conditions.
c.
Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
d.
Clean all exposed structure where no ceiling occurs.
END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01500 - 11
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the
Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for
handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms
used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"
"accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have wellrecognized meanings in the construction industry.
1.
"Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased
for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product"
includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
a.
2.
"Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name,
including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in
the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date
of the Contract Documents.
b.
"Foreign Products," as distinguished from "domestic products," are items
substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside the United
States and its possessions. Products produced or supplied by entities
substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens
of, nor living within, the United States and its possessions are also
considered to be foreign products.
"Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished,
refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01600 - 1
3.
1.4
"Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually
operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind
from a single source.
B.
Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint
manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products
that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.
1.
2.
Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surfaces or,
where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are
not conspicuous.
Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of serviceconnected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface
that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the
following information and other essential operating data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.5
A.
Name of product and manufacturer.
Model and serial number.
Capacity.
Speed.
Ratings.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations,
using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including
theft.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,
theft, and other losses.
Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and
measurement of quantity or counting of units.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01600 - 2
6.
7.
Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not
endanger the supporting construction.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a
weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRODUCT SELECTION
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of
installation.
1.
2.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other
devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and
effect.
Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have
been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations
govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the
following:
1.
Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or
more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No
substitutions will be permitted.
a.
2.
Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name,
accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply with
the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain
approval for use of an unnamed product.
Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product
or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand
or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and
otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
3.
Performance Specification Requirements:
Where Specifications require
compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with
these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01600 - 3
a.
4.
5.
Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only
require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product
that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.
Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample,
the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a.
6.
7.
Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product
literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.
Where no product available within the specified category matches
satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with
provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for
selection of a matching product in another product category.
Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "... as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar
phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified
requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the
product line selected.
Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance"
provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for
procedures required for processing such selections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of
products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place,
accurately located and aligned with other Work.
1.
Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage
and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01600 - 4
SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests
for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the
applicability of industry standards to products specified.
Division 1 Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the
Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittal Schedule.
Division 1 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing
the Contractor's selection of products and product options.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in
the Contract Documents.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
required by the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the
Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The following are not
considered to be requests for substitutions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum
prior to award of the Contract, are included in the Contract Documents and are not
subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.
Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract
Documents.
The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and
orders issued by governing authorities.
SUBSTITUTIONS
01631 - 1
1.4
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
A.
Substitutions will not be considered between the bid date and the award of the contract.
B.
Substitutions will not be allowed after award of the contract except when, through no
fault of the Contractor, none of the specified products is available.
1.5
A.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE
Submission of request for substitution shall constitute a representation that the entity
making the request:
1.
2.
3.
Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or better
than the specified product. Absence of an explicit comparison of any
characteristic of the proposed product to the specified product shall constitute a
representation that the proposed product is equal to or better than the specified
product with regard to that characteristic.
Will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified
product.
Will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required
for the work to be complete in all respects, including:
a.
b.
4.
Re-design.
Additional components and capacity required by other work affected by the
change.
Waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently
may become apparent and which are caused by the change.
B.
Substitutions will not be considered when acceptance would require substantial revision
of the contract documents or additional costs unless Contractor advises in writing that
substitution is being proposed at no additional cost to Owner.
C.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing
or product data submittals without prior separate written request.
D.
Substitution requests will not be considered when submitted directly by subcontractor
and supplier.
E.
Substitution Request Procedure:
Submit written request with complete data
substantiating compliance of the proposed product with the requirements of the contract
documents.
1.
2.
Submit request to the Architect.
Submit 1 copy of each request and accompanying data.
SUBSTITUTIONS
01631 - 2
F.
Data Required with Substitution Request: Provide at least the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Identify product by specification section and paragraph number.
Manufacturer's name and address, trade name and model number of product (if
applicable).
Complete product data.
An itemized comparison of the proposed product to the specified product.
Net amount of change to the contract sum. (Credit only).
List of maintenance services and replacement materials available.
Statement of the effect of the substitution on the construction schedule.
Description of changes that will be required inother work or products if the
substitute product is approved.
G.
The Architect will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution.
H.
When the proposed substitution is not accepted, provide the product (or one of the
products listed, as the case may be) specified.
I.
Products accepted as substitutes will be issued in A.S.I.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for
substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined
by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return
the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.
Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract
Documents.
The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the
Contract Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or
method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or
coordinate activities properly.
The request is directly related to an "or-equal" clause or similar language in the
Contract Documents.
The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time,
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional responsibilities
may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services,
increased cost of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations.
SUBSTITUTIONS
01631 - 3
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary
approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner
that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other
materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty
required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the
proposed substitution provides the required warranty.
The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product
Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents
do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor do they constitute
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
SUBSTITUTIONS
01631 - 4
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.3
A.
Inspection procedures.
Project record document submittal.
Operation and maintenance manual submittal.
Submittal of warranties.
Final cleaning.
Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate
Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.
In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date
Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion
of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these
Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to
the Contract Sum.
If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete
items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not
complete.
Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates,
and similar releases.
Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final project photographs, damage
or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 1
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a written request for inspection, the Architect will
either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The
Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or
advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the
certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
A.
The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured by the Contractor
that the Work is substantially complete.
Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
acceptance.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner.
Advise the Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner's operation and
maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary facilities from the
site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleanup requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes.
Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not
previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products
and completed operations where required.
Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the
Contract Sum.
Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and
similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took
possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Submit consent of surety to final payment.
Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
Submit signed receipt by Owner indicated acceptance of all extra stock items,
keys and operating keys for miscellaneous items.
Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice
that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been
completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances
acceptable to the Architect.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 2
1.
2.
1.5
Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final
acceptance. If the Work is still considered incomplete, the Architect will advise
the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been
fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
If necessary, reinspection will be repeated only once. If additional inspections are
required, the Architect and/or consultant is to be compensated for their time based
on the standard billing rate for the personnel doing the work.
RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record
documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide
access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation
where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark
which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop
Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the
Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be
difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between
variations in separate categories of the Work.
Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on
Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.
Note related change-order numbers where applicable.
Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durablepaper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover
of each set.
In the set of documents, mount all supplemental drawings issued for the project
including addenda, ASI, change orders or any other clarification. Mount drawing
to back of previous page showing work references. (NO EXCEPTION!)
Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including
addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction
documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during
construction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications.
Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information
on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by
direct observation.
Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for
the Owner's records.
Highlight which brand of items were used on this project, in each section of
specifications.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 3
D.
Shop Drawing: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related
Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
3.
Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered
to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that
cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the
Architect for the Owner's records.
E.
Record Sample Submitted:
Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the
Contractor shall meet with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to
determine which Samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes.
Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding delivery to the Owner's Sample storage
area.
F.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals:
Refer to other Specification Sections for
requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial
Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify
miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference.
Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
G.
Maintenance Manuals: Total of three (3) required. Organize operation and
maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in
individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3-ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket
folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine
of each binder. In addition to operation and maintenance data include the following
types of information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Emergency instructions.
Spare parts list and local suppliers' name, address and phone number.
Copies of warranties.
Wiring diagrams.
Recommended "turn-around" cycles.
Inspection procedures.
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
Fixture lamping schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that
requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction
in proper operation and maintenance. Review Specifications Divisions 2 through 16 for
specific requirements of training. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives
if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Contractor to
video tape training sessions and provide one copy to Owner as a permanent record for
future reference and training of personnel. Include a detailed review of the following
items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Maintenance manuals.
Record documents.
Spare parts and materials.
Tools.
Lubricants.
Fuels.
Identification systems.
Control sequences.
Hazards.
Cleaning.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Startup.
Shutdown.
Emergency operations.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Safety procedures.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Effective energy utilization.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular
site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls."
B.
Cleaning: See Division 1 Section 01710 “Final Cleaning”, for requirements.
END OF SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
01700 - 5
SECTION 01710 - FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at
Substantial Completion.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
C.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" specifies
general cleanup and waste-removal requirements.
Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies general contract closeout
requirements.
Special cleaning requirements for specific construction elements are included in
appropriate Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
Environmental Requirements: Conduct cleaning and waste-disposal operations in
compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local
environmental and antipollution regulations.
1.
2.
Do not dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in
storm or sanitary drains.
Burning or burying of debris, rubbish, or other waste material on the premises is
not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer
or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
FINAL CLEANING
01710 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General:
Provide final-cleaning operations.
Employ experienced workers or
professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of Work to the
condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Clean the Project Site, yard and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material,
litter, and foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved
to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from the
site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to the building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Broom clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap.
Shampoo, if required.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable visionobscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
13.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
FINAL CLEANING
01710 - 2
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean food-service equipment to a sanitary condition, ready and acceptable for its
intended use.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and
mercury vapor fixtures.
Leave the Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection
and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Comply with regulations of local
authorities.
D.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during
construction to protect previously completed installations during the remainder of the
construction period.
E.
Compliances: Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning
operations. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully.
1.
Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they
become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the
Owner.
END OF SECTION 01710
FINAL CLEANING
01710 - 3
SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and
bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship
and materials.
General closeout requirements are included in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installation that are specified
to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through - 16.
Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties
do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor
does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special
warranties with the Contractor. All warranties do not become effective until the Date of
Substantial Completion. All mechanical and electrical equipment suppliers shall include costs
as necessary to meet this warranty requirement. (NO EXCEPTIONS!)
WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
Contractors and material and equipment suppliers shall be responsible for providing any
additional or extended warranties and associated costs, required to provide the specified warranty
period beginning from the date of Substantial Completion. (No Exceptions).
Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and
replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and
replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by
replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740 - 1
Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or
rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work
regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its
anticipated useful service life.
Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties,
and shall not limit the duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under the law,
nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce
such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections
to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty,
certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until evidence
is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
SUBMITTALS
Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion.
If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for
warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of
the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a
subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate
terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner
through the Architect for approval prior to final execution.
Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through -16 for specific content requirements, and
particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered
loose-leaf binders (total of three (3) required), thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,
and sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. Provide typed index showing all items included. At
Contractor's options, warranties and bonds can be included in the operations and maintenance
manuals for architectural items.
Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address and telephone number of
the installer.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740 - 2
Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES
AND BONDS," the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor.
When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranteed construction, provide
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)
END OF SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740 - 3
SECTION 07241 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over fiberglass mat faced gypsum
sheathing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Class PB EIFS:
Physical properties and structural performance that comply with
ANSI/EIMA 99-A.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations,
terminations, joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Product certificates.
E.
Product test reports.
F.
Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.
G.
Evaluation reports.
H.
Maintenance data.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as
qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
07241 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2.
SonoWall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc.
3.
Sto Corp.
MATERIALS
A.
Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and
finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with
substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.
B.
Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates
from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and
adhesive used for application of insulation.
C.
Insulation Adhesive: Standard formulation.
D.
Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I;
EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board."
1.
E.
Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other EIFS materials; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd.
Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.
Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.
F.
Base-Coat Materials: Standard formulation.
G.
Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer.
H.
Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced mildew
resistance.
1.
Colors As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer
and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate.
J.
Trim Accessories: manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784
and ASTM C 1063.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
07241 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
B.
Primer/Sealer: Apply over fiberglass mat faced gypsum sheathing.
C.
Trim: Apply trim accessories at locations indicated on Drawings.
D.
Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach to substrate.
E.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where
expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar
substrates, materials, and construction; and where wall height changes.
F.
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in
writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
G.
Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat
material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.
1.
H.
Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
1.
3.2
Standard-impact reinforcing mesh.
Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1.
According to ICC-ES AC219.
B.
Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified
requirements.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 07241
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
07241 - 3
SECTION 07841 – FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the
following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings
containing penetrating items:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Walls.
Floors.
Ceilings.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for construction of walls.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: For the following constructions, provide joint firestop systems sealant and
backer rod based that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original
fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
B.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings of 2
hours, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of adjacent
constructions.
C.
For joint firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,
provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
D.
For joint firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings
of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07841 - 1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each joint firestop system, show each kind of construction
condition penetrated, and relationships to adjoining construction. Include firestop
design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and
inspecting agency that is applicable to joint firestop.
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint firestop system products
certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
D.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating joint firestop system
complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed throughpenetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain joint firestop systems, from a single joint manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide joint firestop systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
1.
1.6
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing
testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver joint firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or
packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing
and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and
mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials for joint firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07841 - 2
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other
causes.
B.
Ventilate joint firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means
or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction to ensure that joint firestop system is installed according to
specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestop systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint firestop systems for
the required application on Drawings, at rated assemblies.
B.
Refer to project drawings for manufacturer and model numbers of assemblies used as a
basis of design. Equal products are acceptable provided they meet or exceed the
physical and performance specifications of the products specified and comply with the
designed appearance of the assemblies.
2.2
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint firestop systems that is compatible with substrates and
with the items, if any, penetrating the joint firestop systems, under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by joint firestop system manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
B.
Accessories: Provide components for each joint firestop system that are needed to
install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only
components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and
approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.
Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation backer rod system.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07841 - 3
2.
Substrate primers (where required by manufactured).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint opening configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning: Clean out joint openings immediately before installing joint firestop
systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of joint opening substrates and from penetrating items
foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration
firestop systems.
Clean joint opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound
surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with joint firestop systems.
Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestop system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent joint firestop systems from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove smears from joint firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as
possible without disturbing joint firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3
A.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
General: Install joint firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements"
Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07841 - 4
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to
support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce
cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
C.
Install fill materials for joint firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are concave to adjoining finishes.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure
joint firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and
remove damaged or deteriorated joint firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce joint firestop systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07841
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07841 - 5
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1.
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated
below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Joints between different materials.
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated
below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Joints between different materials.
Perimeter joints between materials and frames of doors and windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint sealant at countertops, casework and Architectural Woodwork
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints of interior openings where indicated.
Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and
concrete walls and partitions.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,
windows.
Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
Perimeter joints of plastic laminate countertops and backsplashes.
Perimeter joints of architectural woodwork.
Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a.
b.
JOINT SEALANTS
Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
07920 - 1
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving".
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion fillers and
gaskets.
Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" for sealing joints related to
flashing and sheet metal for roofing.
Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for through-penetration firestopping systems.
Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing concealed perimeter
joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and
to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or
deterioration of joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced and installed to
establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no
staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1.
Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and
cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling
use of volatile organic compounds.
C.
Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples,
consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each
product exposed to view.
D
Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply
with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint
sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project
that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 2
from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
C.
Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based
on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product
formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test
results to Architect.
1.
2.
1.6
Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference
to ASTM C 920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and
cohesion under cyclic movement (per ASTM C 719), low-temperature flexibility,
modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of
accelerated weathering.
Include test results performed on joint sealants after they have cured for 1 year.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,
pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.7
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1.
2.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits
permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4 deg C).
When joint substrates are wet.
B.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint
substrates.
1.8
A.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days
after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1.
2.
2.2
Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
colors for products of type indicated.
At exterior masonry, sealant color to match color of adjacent masonry field. Field
coordinate sealant colors and approval, primarily at accent banding, prior to
installation completion. Provide a mock-up area for review and approval prior to
sealant installation.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing
elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on
each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this Section, including those
requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified in each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet.
C.
Installation Locations: Refer to sealant data sheet for applicable substrates. Sealant to
be installed at all applicable exterior joints, interior control joints, interior face of joints
in exterior walls and other interior working joints.
2.3
A.
SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS
Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing
acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both,
with capability when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the following percentage change in joint
width existing at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for
Project without failing cohesively:
1.
2.
7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 15
percent.
12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total of 25
percent.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 4
B.
Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, solvent-release-curing,
pigmented synthetic rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for
sealing joints 3/16 inch (5 mm) or smaller in width.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acrylic Sealant:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant:
a.
2.4
"60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp.
"PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc.
"PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc.
"Mono," Tremco, Inc.
"PTI 200," Protective Treatments, Inc.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable
latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or
cohesively.
B.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that
accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and
compression for a total of 10 percent.
C.
Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except
for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint
movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of
50 percent.
D.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2.
Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant:
a.
b.
c.
3.
"AC-20," Pecora Corp.
"Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
"Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
Silicone-Emulsion Sealant:
a.
"Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Corning Corp.
E. Installation Locations: Sealant to be installed at interior non-working joints, for example,
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 5
joint between door frame and wall, interior wood trim joints, other joints requiring sealant
prior to application of finishes.
2.4
A.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less than 25 per
ASTM E 84.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
Manufacturer's standard, nondrying,
nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne
sound.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant:
a.
b.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.6
"SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co.
"AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora Corp.
"BA-98," Pecora Corp.
"Tremco Acoustical Sealant," Tremco, Inc.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience
and laboratory testing.
B.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,
nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size,
shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance:
1.
C.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas,
nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
Elastomeric Tubing Joint Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying
with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, capable of remaining resilient at
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 6
temperatures down to -26 deg F (-32 deg C). Provide products with low compression
set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and
otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D.
2.7
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Refer to project drawings for extent of casework and architectural woodwork to receive
sealant. Casework indicated as alternate or owner provided to receive sealant as part of
the base bid. Casework is located on the project drawings and includes science
casework, media center casework, music specialties casework, and architectural
woodwork items as noted on the project drawings.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following
requirements:
1.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective
coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 7
2.
3.
4.
water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous
joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate
capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other
nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer
based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer
to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas
of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent
requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard:
Comply with recommendations of
ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to
materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D.
Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
1.
Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during
application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
b.
c.
d.
JOINT SEALANTS
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant
application and replace with dry material.
07920 - 8
2.
Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used
between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
E.
Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants
directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses
provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and
depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install
sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use
tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
1.
2.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where
indicated.
a.
3.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess
depth and at locations indicated.
CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
that they are without deterioration, dirt stains discoloration or damage at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut
out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT
A.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: ES1
B.
Base Polymer: Urethane.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 9
C.
Type: S (single component).
D.
Grade: NS (nonsag).
E.
Class: 25.
F.
Use[s] Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic).
G.
Uses Related to Joint Substrates:
indicated, O.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
M, G, A and, as applicable to joint substrates
Use M Substrate: Mortar joints.
Use G Substrate: Glass joints.
Use A Substrate: Aluminum joints.
Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, limestone,
marble, ceramic tile, and wood.
Available Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bostik Inc.
Mameco International, Inc.
Pecoraa Corporation.
Products Research & Chemical Corporation.
Sika Corporation.
Sonneborn Building Products Division ChemRex, Inc.
Tremco, Inc.
W.R. Meadows, Inc.
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
07920 - 10
SECTION 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI
Recommended Standards:
1.
2.
3.
Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior
and exterior locations.
Doors: Seamless, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for
interior and exterior locations.
Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions,interior
glazed panels, and other interior and exterior openings of following type:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the
following:
a.
b.
5.
Welded unit type.
Knockdown field assembled type.
Drywall Slip-On type.
Door and window opening in H.M. bucks.
Labeled and fire rated.
Thermal rated (insulated).
Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.
B.
Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
C.
Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 Section.
D.
Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section.
E.
Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section.
F.
Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in
Division 4.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
1 Specification Sections.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 1
B.
Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,
materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings,
profiles, and finishes.
C.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames.
Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at
openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and
frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
1.
2.
D.
1.4
Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details
and openings as those on contract drawings.
Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing
requirements.
Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and
exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that
each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and
construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended
Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames" ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein
specified.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door
and frame assemblies whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per
ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey,
or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
1.5
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested
assemblies, provide manufacturer's certification that doors conform to all standard
construction requirements of tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except
for size.
Temperature Rise Rating: At stairwell enclosures, provide doors which have
Temperature Rise Rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of
fire exposure.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during
transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of
factory-finished doors and frames.
B.
Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired
provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to
Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 2
C.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches
(100-mm) high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters
which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet,
remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to
promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors
and frames by one of the following:
1.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.2
Amweld Building Products, Inc.
Ceco Corp.
Copco Door Co.
Curries Company.
Fenestra Corp.
Metal Products, Inc., Corbin, Kentucky.
Republic Builders Products.
Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,
complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M).
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets:
Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with
ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M) and ASTM A 568 (ASTM A 568M).
C.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality,
complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), or drawing quality, ASTM A 642
(ASTM A 642M), hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525 with A60 or
G60 (ASTM A 525M with ZF180 or Z180) coating designation, mill phosphatized.
D.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 0.05-inch (3-mm) sheet steel;
galvanized where used with galvanized frames.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built
into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as
applicable.
F.
Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.
1.
Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a
base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 3
and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames."
G.
2.3
A.
Typical Reinforcing: Provide minimum hinge reinforcement 3/16 inch by 1-1/2 inch by
10 inch. Provide similar reinforcement for hardware items as required to adequately
withstand stresses, minimum 16 gauge, including channel reinforcement for door
closers and closer arms, door holders and similar items. Provide reinforcement and
clearances for concealed in-head door closers and for mortise locks.
DOORS
Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models and types specified below and as
indicated on drawings or schedules:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
FRAMES
Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings,
unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.05-inch (1.3-mm) coldrolled steel.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.5
A.
Fabricate frames with mitered, coped, or welded corners.
Form exterior frames from 14-gage galvanized steel.
Form interior frames from 16-gage steel.
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on
strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
1.
C.
Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush,
minimum 18 guage cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless,
minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel faces.
Rated Doors: 16 gauge (or heavier if required by label).
Provide custom located silencers on door frames at toilet stall doors.
Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.02-inch (0.5-mm) steel plaster guards or mortar
boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct
hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
FABRICATION
Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from
defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's
plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before
shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100
requirements.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 4
1.
2.
Internal Construction:
Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane,
polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core
with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in
accordance with SDI standards.
Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) at jambs and heads except between
non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). Not more than 3/4
inch (19 mm) at bottom.
B.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units,
from only cold-rolled steel.
C.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors
and Frames."
D.
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and
moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.
E.
Fabricate exterior doors, toilet stall doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet
steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors and
toilet stall doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.06inch (1.5 mm) inverted steel channels.
F.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads
for exposed screws and bolts.
G.
Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown
or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies
and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door
assemblies.
1.
H.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of
0.41 Btu/hr x sq. ft. x deg F (2.3 W/sq. m x K) or better.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed
hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by
hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series
Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
1.
For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcing and
provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
I.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware with 16 gauge
galvanized sheet. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at
project site.
J.
Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance
with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and
Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 5
K.
Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,
including galvanized surfaces.
1.
2.
L.
Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials
before application of paint.
Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly
finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
Glazing Stops:
aluminum.
1.
2.
3.
Minimum 0.04-inch (1.0-mm) steel or .040-inch (1.0- mm) thick
Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of
interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and
other panels in doors.
Pre-drill stops and frames during fabrication, verify glass thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final
shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
B.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection
Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces
and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
In concrete or masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to
hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.
Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee anchors.
At existing concrete or masonry construction, provide 3 completed opening
anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding
heights on strike jamb, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts
and masonry anchorage devices. Grind heads, fill depression with metal patching
material, grind smooth.
Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.
In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike
levels. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified in ANSI/SDI-100.
1.
Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 6
3.2
ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.
B.
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic
wrappings from prefinished doors.
C.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors
and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111 - 7
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and storefront work:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
1.3
Exterior entrance doors.
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront, including entrances
specified to be factory glazed, are included in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with
performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's
corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated.
B.
Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront framing systems to
provide for expansion and contraction of the component materials. Entrance doors shall
function normally over the specified temperature range.
1.
C.
The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface temperature range of
180 deg F (100 deg C) without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on
structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, stress
on glass, or other detrimental effects.
Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems that comply
with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements
indicated.
1.
Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies capable of
withstanding wind pressures of 20 psf (958 Pa) inward and 20 psf (958 Pa)
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 1
outward acting normal to the plane of the wall.
D.
Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in accordance with
ASTM E 330. At the conclusion of the tests there shall be no glass breakage or
permanent damage to fasteners, anchors, hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing
members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear
span.
1.
2.
Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure required to measure
deflection of framing members normal to the plane of the wall shall be equivalent
to the wind load specified above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear
span, when subjected to uniform load deflection test.
Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures required to measure
deflection parallel to the plane of the wall shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind
pressures specified above. Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load
shall not exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent of the
design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance between the member
and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed member above to less than 1/8 inch (3
mm). The clearance between the member and an operable door or window shall
be at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
E.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system with an air
infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. (0.3 L/s x sq. m) of fixed area
(excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an
inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa).
F.
Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration
(excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance
with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. (299 Pa).
G.
Condensation Resistance: Where framing systems are "thermal-break" construction,
provide units tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 showing
condensation resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 57.
H.
Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U-value of not
more than 0.56 BTU/hr x sq. ft. x deg F (3.7 W/sq. m x K) at 15 mph (24 kph) exterior
wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 2
Division 1 Specification Sections.
1.
Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required,
including:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system required,
including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
4.
1.5
Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.
Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work.
Elevations at 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50) scale.
Detail sections of typical composite members.
Anchors and reinforcement.
Hardware mounting heights.
Provisions for expansion and contraction.
Glazing details.
Samples for Initial Color Selection: Mfr standard clear anodized and standard
color samples and charts. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include
2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color
variations.
Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require
additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and
design of hardware and accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
Engage an experienced Installer who has completed
installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar in design and extent to those
required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and storefront systems
produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those
indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance for
a period of 5 years.
C.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance and storefront systems from
one source and from a single manufacturer.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 3
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original
protective packaging.
B.
Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or
concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting
in a manner to permit circulation of air.
1.
1.7
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication.
Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delay of the work.
1.
1.8
A.
Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and
coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit.
WARRANTY
Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by
Contractor and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
necessarily limited to:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid
significant or permanent damage.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air
infiltration.
Faulty operation.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Warranty Period:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Framing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Glazing: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 4
Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide entrance and
storefront systems manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Amarlite Architectural Products.
CMI-Cronstroms Mfg. Inc.
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer Company, Inc. (Encore with 500 Wide Stile Entrance Doors)**
YKK Architectural Products.
Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc.
United States Aluminum Corp.
Vistawall Architectural Products.
**Denotes manufacturer and system upon which specification is based.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength,
corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M) for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for
aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M) for aluminum bars, rods
and wire.
B.
Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with
ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for
cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot rolled sheet and
strip.
C.
Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section
of these specifications.
D.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel,
or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with
aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components.
1.
Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members less than
0.125 inches (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic
stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 5
2.
in splined grommet nuts.
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of
hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat-head machine screws that
match the finish of member or hardware being fastened.
E.
Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (0.5-mm) minimum dead-soft stainless steel, or
0.026-inch (0.7-mm) thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by
manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
F.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Provide high-strength aluminum brackets and
reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide nonmagnetic stainless
steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123.
G.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or hot-dip galvanized
steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123.
H.
Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable compressible
weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 or molded
PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.
I.
Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weatherstripping of
wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing,
complying with AAMA 701.2.
2.3
A.
COMPONENTS
Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing systems fabricated
from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include sub sills and
reinforcing members as required for installation.. Provide for center glazing storefront
from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble
frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed
seams.
1.
Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the glazing face to receive resilient
elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make
provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior.
2.
Framing size: Unless specifically noted otherwise on project drawings, provide
1.75” x 4.5” nominal configuration.
3.
Assembly Type: 1” insulated glazing, Front Glazed, Screw Spline or shear block
as application requires.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 6
4.
B.
Accessories: Internal frame reinforcement as required for installations indicated.
Provide separate sill set in full bed of sealant where indicated on project drawings,
material and finish to match storefront.
Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with
mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or jbolts.
1.
Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without
disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops,
with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval.
2.
Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) thick doors of design indicated.
a.
3.
4.
2.4
A.
Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch (44-mm) thick doors of design indicated.
Lights: Provide glazed openings as indicated, with aluminum moldings and stops.
Provide nonremovable stops on the exterior.
FABRICATION
General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to designs, sizes and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile
requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with
maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and
coordination with other work.
1.
B.
Wide stile (4 inches or more nominal width).
Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate storefront framing system with an
integrally concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier, located between exterior
materials and exposed interior members to eliminate direct metal-to-metal
contact. Use manufacturer's standard construction that has been in use for similar
projects for period of not less than 3 years.
Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and
other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the Project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1.
2.
Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and
grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. Complete
these operations for hardware prior to application of finishes.
Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time of installation
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 7
3.
C.
at project site.
Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth to
remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.
1.
Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a manner as to
minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished surface.
D.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as necessary for
performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
E.
Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a suitable
sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces.
Do not use coatings containing lead.
F.
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of
contacting members.
1.
Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have
an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the
sample pair submittal.
G.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H.
Weatherstripping:
For exterior and vestibule
doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding weatherstripping
retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.
1.
2.
2.5
Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail,
adjustable for contact with threshold.
At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene
silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 8
C.
Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A3 / A34 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular
as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or
thicker) complying with AAMA 611 with full custom color selections from
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with
requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect
installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions
before proceeding with the installation.
1.
3.2
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
B.
Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members,
doors, or panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established
lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
Internal steel reinforcing is required for all frames as indicated on frame elevations in
drawings.
C.
Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to comply with the
following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 8.7 m) of
length or 1/4 inch (6 mm) in any total length.
Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two
identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements
shall not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at corners shall
not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after
fabrication.
Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum.
Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with
alkali resistant coating.
Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with aluminum and exposed
to the elements or otherwise subject to wetting, with two coats of aluminum house
paint. Seal joints between the materials with sealant.
E.
Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items. Comply
with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed
fasteners wherever possible.
F.
Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers
or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements
of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
G.
Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass and other
panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by
manufacturer.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
ADJUSTING
Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding,
and for weathertight closure.
PROTECTION
Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction
period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or
deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410 - 10
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Insulated, Clear, Wire Glass, Tempered, Insulated.
a.
b.
b.
B.
Related Sections:
Section.
1.
3.
1.3
Storefront assemblies.
Vision lites.
Entrances and other doors.
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
Aluminum storefronts.
Flush wood doors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or
fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard.
B.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use due to
causes other than glass breakage and improper practices for maintaining, and cleaning
insulating glass. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or
film on the interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and cleaning
glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.
1.4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to
withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where
applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or
gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other
defects in construction.
B.
Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing only. Confirm
glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
GLAZING
08800 - 1
lites for the various size openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heattreated) to meet or exceed the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
Minimum glass thickness, nominally, of lites in exterior walls is 6 mm.
Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated are the same
throughout Project.
Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed or heat-treated
glass, are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the
following:
a.
C.
Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing
components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due
to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1.
1.5
8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and
under wind action. Determine minimum thickness of monolithic annealed
glass according to ASTM E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass,
determine thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis
including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on type of
glass.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 F deg (67 C deg), ambient; 180 F deg (100 C
deg), material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
C.
Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch (300 mm) square samples of each type of
glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch (300 mm) long
samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed
to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in
color of the adjoining framing system.
D.
Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their
products comply with specified requirements.
1.
E.
Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing
manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided
labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that
glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants.
Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant
GLAZING
08800 - 2
performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
F.
Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating
that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials
including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
G.
Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing
compliance with requirements specified.
H.
Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1.
2.
B.
FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual."
SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines".
Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of
16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently
marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or
other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Fire-Resistive Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those tested
per ASTM E 152, labeled and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently
marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate
certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below:
1.
Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).
E.
Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.
F.
Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product
indicated below:
1.
2.
GLAZING
Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated.
Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated.
08800 - 3
3.
Insulating glass of each construction indicated.
G.
Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from
one source for each product and installation method indicated.
H.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to sealant manufacturers,
samples of each glass, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will
contact or affect glazing sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated
below:
1.
Use test methods standard with sealant manufacturer to determine if priming and
other specific preparation techniques are required for rapid, optimum glazing
sealants adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
A.
A.
1.9
Submit not less than nine pieces of each type and finish of glass-framing members
and each type, class, kind, condition, and form of glass (monolithic, laminated,
insulating units) for adhesion testing, as well as one sample of each glazing
accessory (gaskets, setting blocks and spacers) for compatibility testing.
Schedule sufficient time to test and analyze results to prevent delay in the Work.
Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and get sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, including using
special primers.
Testing is not required when glazing sealant manufacturer can submit required
preparation data that is acceptable to Architect and is based on previous testing of
current sealant products for adhesion to and compatibility with submitted glazing
materials.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes,
direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.
1.8
Perform tests under normal environmental conditions during installation.
Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes,
comply with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing
to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials
manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation,
or other causes.
WARRANTY
GLAZING
08800 - 4
A.
General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty signed by
manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish replacements for insulating glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture,
freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty
covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published
instructions.
1.
Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified in Product Data Sheets at end of this Section, or equal.
PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class as indicated below,
and Quality q3 (glazing select).
1.
B.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
Refer to requirements for sealed insulating glass units for performance characteristics of
assembled units composed of tinted glass, coated or uncoated, relative to visible light
transmittance, U-values, shading coefficient, and visible reflectance.
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS
Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1, Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as
indicated below.
1.
B.
Class 1.
Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated and required by Kentucky Building
Code.
Uncoated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated
GLAZING
08800 - 5
surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat-absorbing and lightreducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint color and performance characteristics for
6 mm thick glass matching those indicated for annealed primary tinted float glass; kind
as indicated below:
1.
C.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide heattreated glass by one of the following, or equal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.5
A.
Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated and required by Kentucky Building
Code and/or to meet loading requirements.
AFG Industries, Inc.
Artistic Glass Products Co.
Cardinal IG.
Saint-Gobain.
Falconer Glass Industries.
Glasstemp, Inc.
Guardian Industries Corp.
HGP Industries.
PPG Industries, Inc.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
Tempglass.
Viracon, Inc.
WIRED GLASS
Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear),
Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1.
Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wired glass by one of
the following companies.
1.
Polished Wired Glass:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6
Mesh m1 (diamond).
Ashai Glass Co.
Central Glass Co., Ltd.
Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd.
Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd.
AFG Industries, Inc.
Guardian Industries Corp.
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
GLAZING
08800 - 6
A.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites
of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other
requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the
end of this Section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
A.
For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements
specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and
conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units.
Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated Kind FT (fully tempered)
where safety glass is designated or required.
Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass are nominal
values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6 mm thick
and nominal 1/2-inch (13 mm) dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise
indicated.
U-values are expressed as Btu/hr x sq. ft. x deg F (W/sq. m x K).
Units shall be tinted. Color selected by Architect.
ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
General:
Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass
units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service,
as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for
selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and
conditions existing at time of installation.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
a.
B.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically
curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920
requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet at the
end of this Section, including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade,
Class and Uses.
1.
C.
Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
standard colors for products of type indicated.
Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is
specified in Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Data Sheet, provide products,
when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per
ASTM C 719, with the capability to withstand the specified percentage change in
the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other
requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistant Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test
GLAZING
08800 - 7
assembly to obtain fire-resistive rating.
2.9
A.
GLAZING TAPES
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a
solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers
for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying
with AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
AAMA 804.1.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam tape, factory
coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls with release liner protecting
adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for product 810.5.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod:
a.
b.
c.
3.
A.
Norseal V-980 Closed-Cell Glazing Tape, Norton Company.
GLAZING GASKETS
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of
profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
B.
PTI 303 Glazing Tape (with shim), Protective Treatments, Inc.
Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco, Inc.
PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape:
a.
2.10
PTI 303 Glazing Tape (shimless), Protective Treatments, Inc.
S-M 5700 Poly-Glaze Tape Sealant, Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Tremco 440 Tape, Tremco Inc.
Extru-Seal, Pecora Corp.
PTI 606 Architectural Sealant Tape, Protective Treatments, Inc.
Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following companies.
1.
GLAZING
Preformed Gaskets:
08800 - 8
a.
b.
c.
2.11
Advanced Elastomer Systems, L.P.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Tremco, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials
involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility
with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side-walking).
F.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers:
Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining,
nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic foam of density, size, and
shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant
performance.
2.12
A.
FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated
for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite
complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing
standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GLAZING
08800 - 9
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows:
1.
2.
Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do
not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within
openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or
bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless
otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.
Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged
glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed,
weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with
referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set
blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (1250 mm) (length plus
height) as follows:
1.
2.
H.
Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct
size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch (3 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final
compressed thickness of tape.
Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
GLAZING
08800 - 10
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar
characteristics.
J.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended
by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are
flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills
first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by
applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not
lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed.
F.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of
openings.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
B.
Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets
producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket
joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
C.
3.6
A.
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face
clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until
sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed
GLAZING
08800 - 11
sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting
or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install
pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture
pockets.
3.7
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances
do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for
build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any
way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
PRIMARY CLEAR FLOAT GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET
A.
Class: Class 1 clear float glass, quality q3 (glazing select).
B.
Provide products by one of the manufacturers listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
GLAZING
AFG Industries, Inc.
Ford Glass Division.
LOF Glass, Inc.
PPG Industries, Inc.
Saint-Gobain/Euroglass.
Guardian Industries Corp.
Viracon (Basis of Design)
08800 - 12
INSULATING GLASS PRODUCT DATA SHEET - 1” INSULATED, Low E, PROVIDE
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
A.
Classification of Units: Per ASTM E 774.
B.
Air Space Width: Nominal 1/2 inch (12 mm) measured perpendicularly from surfaces
of glass lites at unit's edge.
Sealing System: Dual seal, primary and secondary sealants: polyisobutylene and
silicone.
C.
D.
Spacer Specifications: Aluminum with mill or clear-anodized finish.
1.
2.
E.
Glass Specifications: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Desiccant: Either molecular sieve or silica gel or blend of both.
Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
Thickness of Each Lite: 0.25 inch.
Indoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered) or Class 1 float glass as indicated.
Outdoor Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered) or Class 1 float glass as indicated.
Low E, Tinted, Coating No. 2 Surface or No. 3 surface as per Mfr. Standards.
Units shall be tinted. Color selected by Architect. Minimum of seven (7) color
selections.
1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
Visible Light Transmittance: 49 percent.
Shading Coefficient: 0.71
Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 5 percent.
Summer U-Value: 0.57
Winter U-Value: 0.48
G.
Refer to clear float glass product data sheet for acceptable manufacturers of insulating
units.
H.
Refer to project drawings for glazing type application of types listed below:
1.
1” INSULATED, Low E, TINTED PANEL ( Typ. Unless noted otherwise)
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 13
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Related Sections: The following contain requirements that relate to this section:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
Interior gypsum partitions.
Interior gypsum soffits
Exterior gyspum.
Tile backing panels.
Trim accessories.
Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping systems and fire-resistive-rated
joint sealants.
Division 9 Section “Gypsum Sheathing” for exterior wall assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for
definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in
other referenced standards.
ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies indicated to have
STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose
STC ratings were determined per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a
qualified independent testing agency.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B.
Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components
certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 1
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are
indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for
fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for
gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.
C.
Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board
and other panel products from a single manufacturer.
D.
Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from
either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or
from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage
from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and
other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
C.
Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions
for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum
board manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,
maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of
gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to
application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when
using temporary heat sources.
C.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 2
rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
A.
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to
minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1.
2.
B.
Domtar Gypsum.
Georgia-Pacific Corp.
Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
United States Gypsum Co.
Thickness: Provide gypsum board thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 for
application system and support spacing indicated.
Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches (1219 mm).
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Type “X” where required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.
Type: Water resistant at all “Wet Areas”.
Edges: Tapered.
Thickness: 1/2” on vertical applications, unless noted otherwise.
½” ceiling gypsum baord for interior horizontal applications, unless
noted otherwise.
¼” and 3/8” for radiussed applications, unless noted otherwise. (Where
½” or greater gypsum ceiling board is noted in the project drawings at
radiused applications provide layers ¼” boards as required to achieve
the noted thickness.)
7.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated:
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board
Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp.
Fire-Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States
Gypsum Co.
SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core, United States
Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 3
f.
Centex American Gypsum Company.
8. Type: Sag resistant for horizontal surface applications such as soffits, ceilings, etc.
C.
Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 442 or, where backing
board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum wallboard, ASTM C 36 and as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
2.
3.
A.
Core: 1/2 inch (15.9 mm)
Glass-Mat Faced, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M.
1.
2.7
Application: Gypsum Board Assemblies at tile applications.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M.
1.
C.
Type: exterior cement board.
Products – Durock. USG Comp.
- Permabase National Gypsum
- Knauf Cement Board.
Thickness: 1/2”, unless otherwise indicated.
TILE BACKING PANELS AND WATER RESISTANT BOARDS
1.
B.
Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type: Type X where indicated or required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.
Edges: Manufacturer's standard.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm), unless noted otherwise.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, "Dens-Shield Tile Backer"
manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp., or equal.
Core: Portland Cement, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thickness, unless noted otherwise.
Application: as noted or at Tile applications on Gypsum board wall assemblies.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Accessories for Interior and Exterior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control
joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below:
3.
Material: Formed metal, complying with the following requirement:
a.
4.
Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 4
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Aluminum Accessories: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard extruded
aluminum accessories of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's product
designations, complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of finish indicated and with not less than the strength and
durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M) for alloy and temper 6063-T5.
Class II Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C12C22A31 (Chemical Finish: cleaned
with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Architectural Class II clear coating with a minimum thickness of 0.4 mil
(0.01 mm)).
Vent Strips:
1.
Provide prefinished perforated aluminum vent strip at exterior cement board
soffits.
a.
2.
Vent types, locations, Product numbers and extents are noted on project
drawings.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum
accessories of one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.8
Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive
joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated.
L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound.
Use L-bead where indicated.
U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without
application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated.
One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip
covering slot opening.
Fry Reglet Corp.
Gordon, Inc.
MM Systems, Inc.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the
recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment
materials for each application indicated.
B.
Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged, job-mixed,
chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based
products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.9
A.
Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or
for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint
compounds applied over it.
For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum
board manufacturer for this purpose.
For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board
behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by the gypsum board
manufacturer for this purpose.
For topping compound, use sandable formulation.
Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners
and face flanges of trim accessories.
Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.
Joint Compound for Cementitious Backer Unit: Material recommended by cementitious
backer unit manufacturer.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following
requirements:
1.
2.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter
joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies per ASTM E 90.
Product has flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of less than 25 per
ASTM E 84.
B.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
Manufacturer's standard nondrying,
nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne
sound.
C.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant:
a.
b.
AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant, Pecora Corp.
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant, United States Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 6
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.10
BA-98, Pecora Corp.
Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with
referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for
laminating gypsum panels.
C.
Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting
hollow metal door frames.
D.
Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum
panels to steel framing.
E.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following applications:
1.
2.
Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch (0.84 mm) thick.
Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
F.
Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel
members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
G.
Corrosion-resistant-coated steel drill screws of size and type recommended by board
manufacturer for fastening cementitious backer units or exterior gypsum soffit board.
H.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:
nonperforated.
I.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: Refer to Specifications for building insulation.
J.
Thermal Insulation: Refer to Specifications for building insulation.
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow
metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 7
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with
installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other provisions
for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that
will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation
well in advance of time needed for coordination with other construction.
APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels
to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B.
Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels
unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end
joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting
end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
D.
Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or
avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in
alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally
with end abutting joints over studs and staggered.
E.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp
panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than
1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
F.
Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.
Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges
abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints
at corners of framed openings where possible.
G.
Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
H.
Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
I.
Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and
doors over 32 inches (800 mm) wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and
immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.
J.
Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 8
space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind
gypsum panels. If not indicated, space and locate as recommended by USG Gypsum
Construction Handbook. Verify joint locations w/Architect prior to installation.
K.
Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces
where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m)
in area.
1.
2.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Refer to partition types general notes for exceptions, Drawing Sht. N-1.
L.
Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments,
except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-to-1/2-inch- (6-to-13-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are
exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical
sealant.
M.
Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at
perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge
trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
N.
Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.4
A.
GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the
greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
C.
Direct-Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to
a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board),
comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, and temporarily brace or
fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
D.
Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular
to supports, with end joints staggered over supports. Install with 1/4-inch (6-mm) open
space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations to provide for
caulk joint.
1.
Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 9
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same
fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to
accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners.
B.
Install corner beads at external corners.
C.
Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or
semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint
compound except where other types are indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and
back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate.
Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are
installed.
Install U-bead where indicated.
D.
Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM
C 840, and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
E.
Install V-joint in exterior gypsum board assemblies where control joints are indicated or
required. Install on cut or ends of gypsum panels, not on tapered edges.
F.
Install surface applied corner guards per manufacturer’s guidelines.
3.6
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A.
General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of
corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects,
and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of
gypsum board finish indicated.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
compound.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having
concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint
treatment at flange edges.
D.
Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish
per GA-214.
1.
2.
3.
Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a
higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and soundrated assemblies.
Level 2 where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for
tile, and where indicated.
Level 3 for gypsum board surfaces where indicated. (None Required)
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 10
4.
5.
E.
Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces receiving wallcoverings. (None Required).
Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces receiving paint.
For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate
coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up
and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual
defects and ready for decoration. Use one of the following joint compound
combinations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Embedding and First Coat: Setting-type joint compound.
Fill (Second) Coat: Setting-type joint compound.
Finish (Third) Coat:
Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping
compound.
Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping
compound.
Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.
Finish (Third) Coat:
Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping
compound.
F.
Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for
embedding coat.
G.
Finish exterior gypsum soffit board using setting-type joint compounds to prefill joints
and embed tape, and for first, fill (second) and finish (third) coats, with the last coat
being a sandable product. Smooth each coat before joint compound hardens to
minimize need for sanding. Sand between coats and after finish coat.
1.
3.7
Painting exterior gypsum soffit board after joint compound finish coat has dried is
specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that
ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09255
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
09255 - 11
SECTION 09900 FLOOR COATING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Stain and clear coat flooring system as shown on the drawings.
B. Related sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Cast-in-Place Concrete
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application of
a deep fill (2 inch) acrylic modified concrete with a pigmented epoxy based floor
coating system with urethane topcoat. The system shall have the color and texture as
specified by the Owner. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the
plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Latest edition of Manufacturer's literature including performance data
and installation procedures.
B. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product being used.
C. LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
1.5
Product data for Credit EQ 4.2: For flooring system, documentation including
VOC content and chemical composition.
MR Credit 2.1, 2.2: Construction waste management, packaging can be
recycled.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the
production, sales, and technical
support of epoxy and urethane industrial flooring and related materials.
The Applicator shall have been approved by the flooring system manufacturer in
all phases of
surface preparation and application of the product specified.
FLOOR COATING
09900 - 1
C.
No requests for substitutions shall be considered that would change the generic
type of the specified System.
System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of
Agriculture (USDA),
Food, Drug Administration (FDA), and local Health Department.
A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General
Contractor and the Owner to review and clarification of this specification,
application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and
production schedule.
D.
E.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping
1. All components of the system shall be delivered to the site in the Manufacturer's
packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number.
B. Storage and Protection
1. The Applicator shall be provided with a storage area for all components. The
area shall be between 60 F and 90 F, dry, out of direct sunlight and in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and
safety regulations.
2. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components shall be kept
on site for review by the Engineer or other personnel.
C. Waste Disposal
1. The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for nonhazardous waste generated during installation of the system.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Site Requirements
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are
between 60 F and 90 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew
point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted.
The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than
85 % and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 F above the dew point.
The Applicator shall ensure that adequate ventilation is available for the work
area.
The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting
level during the preparation and installation of the system.
FLOOR COATING
09900 - 2
B.
Conditions of new concrete to be coated with epoxy material.
1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days and have fully cured a
minimum of twenty eight days in accordance with ACI-308 prior to the application of
the coating system pending moisture tests.
2. Concrete shall have a flat rubbed finish, float or light steel trowel finish (a hard
steel trowel finish is neither necessary or desirable).
3.
Sealers and curing agents should not to be used.
4.
Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor barrier to
protect against the effects of vapor transmission and possible delamination of the
system.
C.
Safety Requirements
1. All open flames and spark-producing equipment shall be removed from the work
area prior to commencement of application.
2. "No Smoking" signs shall be posted at the entrances to the work area.
3. The Owner shall be responsible for the removal of foodstuffs from the work area.
4.
Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
FLOORING
A. Stain and clear coat
1. System Materials;
a.
Spray two coats of Kolour Dye
b. Primer: Apply flat squeegee coat of 100% solids epoxy
c. Fill: Fill major divots and joints with elastomeric epoxy and paper
filler and approved color
d.
Base Coat: Apply roll coat of 100% solids epoxy
e.
Topcoat: Aliphatic Urethane with Aluminum oxide grit
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting flooring performance.
1.
3.2
Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for flooring installation and
comply with requirements specified.
PREPARATION
A. General
1.
New and existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing
FLOOR COATING
09900 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
compounds, loose particles, moss,
algae growth, laitance, friable matter, dirt, and bituminous products.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test ASTM F 1869-98.
a.
Perform three tests for the first 1,000 sf and then one test per 1,000 sf after
that.
b.
Application will proceed only when the vapor/moisture emission rates
from the slab is less than and not higher than 3 lbs/1,000 sf/24 hrs.
c.
If the vapor drive exceeds 3 lbs/1,000 sf/24 hrs then the Owner and/or
Engineer shall be notified and advised of additional cost for the possible
installation of a vapor mitigation system that has been approved by the
manufacturer or other means to lower the value to the acceptable limit.
There shall be no visible moisture present on the surface at the time of
application of the system. Compressed oil-free air and/or a light passing of a
propane torch may be used to dry the substrate.
Mechanical surface preparation
a. Diamond grind or acid wash all surfaces to receive flooring system with a dust
recycling machine. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint,
toppings hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other
similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare
concrete surface.
b. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast machines shall be mechanically
abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using
diamond grinders, needle guns, bush hammers, or other suitable equipment.
c.
Where the perimeter of the substrate to be coated is not adjacent to a wall
or curb, a minimum 1/4 inch key cut shall be made to properly seat the system,
providing a smooth transition between areas. The detail cut shall also apply to
drain perimeters and expansion joint edges.
d.
Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 1/8 inch wide are to be
chiseled or chipped-out and repaired per manufacturer’s recommendations.
At spalled or worn areas, mechanically remove loose or delaminated concrete to
a sound concrete and patch per manufactures recommendations.
APPLICATION
A. General
1.
FLOOR COATING
The system shall be applied in the steps as listed below:
a.
Substrate preparation
b.
Stain
I. Apply two coats of Kolour Dye using an acetone sprayer. Each
quart of Kolour Dye is to be mixed with one gallon of acetone.
c. Priming
II. Apply Flat squeegee coat of 100 % solid epoxy . Components
should be mixed per manufacturer’s instructions.
d. Base coat application.
III. Apply Roll coat of 100% solid epoxy . Components should be
mixed per manufacturer’s instructions.
e. Topcoat application
09900 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests, Inspection
1.
3.5
IV. Apply aliphatic urethane with aluminum oxide grit using rollers,
and brushes. Components should be mixed per manufacturer’s
instructions.
Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the
surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be
removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil-free compressed air.
The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a
safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or
other leveling work has been specified by the Architect.
A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be
provided by the Applicator.
The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator:
a.
Temperature
1.
Air, substrate temperatures and, if applicable, dew point.
b.
Coverage Rates
1.
Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of
material used against the area covered.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer’s directions, taking care
to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to
completion of the curing process.
B.
Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave
cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections.
END OF SECTION 09900
FLOOR COATING
09900 - 5
SECTION 09910 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior
and exterior items and surfaces.
1.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors or finish are designated in schedules,
except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to
remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same
as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the
Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in
addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.
Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts
(including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed
metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Include painting of
electrical panels at Architect's direction.
Painting includes all exterior work, exposed surfaces, gyp. board soffits, exposed
metal, piping, etc.
All paint materials shall be low V.O.C., no exceptions.
Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed
surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.
Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished
components:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Acoustic materials.
Architectural woodwork and casework.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Switchgear.
Distribution cabinets (except electrical panel covers at direction of
Architect.)
2.
Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the
following generally inaccessible areas:
PAINTING
09910 - 1
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
D.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other
code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or
nomenclature plates.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1.
2.
E.
Anodized aluminum.
Stainless steel.
Chromium plate.
Copper.
Bronze.
Brass.
Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment,
such as the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Furred areas.
Utility tunnels.
Pipe spaces and plumbing chase.
Duct shafts.
"Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel.
"Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal.
Maintenance Stock:
1.
Maintenance Stock:
a.
b.
At time of completing application, deliver stock of maintenance material
to the Owner. Furnish not less than two properly labeled and sealed one
gallon cans of each type of finish coat of each color, taken from lots
furnished for the work.
Provide a typed listing of all color codes for the Owner’s use.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
PAINTING
09910 - 2
B.
Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts.
1.
After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be
coated.
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be
applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the
actual substrate.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed
painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the
Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the
same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in
storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.
Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags
and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas
are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and
application.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A.
Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temp. is between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and
surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
PAINTING
09910 - 3
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds
85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be
painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the
manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
The Glidden Company (Glidden).
Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
Sonneborn Building Products (Concrete Sealers).
Porter Paints
Town & Ranch Paints
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and
related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of
the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
1.
C.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to
designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are
required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other
manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of
performance for proposed substitutions.
Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full
range of standard colors.
2.3 PRIMERS
A.
Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are
compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
PAINTING
09910 - 4
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.
5019 PVA Primer.
Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201.
6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Devoe:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
Devoe:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
41820 Bar-Ox Alkyd Shop/Field Primer Grey.
5205 Glid-Guard Tank and Structural Primer.
IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-612 Speedhide Inhibitive White Primer.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
Galvanized Metal Primers:
a.
Devoe:
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
b.
Glidden:
5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.
c.
Moore:
IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
d.
PPG:
6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer.
e.
S-W:
Galvite B50W3.
2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
A.
Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated
undercoat materials that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel.
a.
Devoe:
b.
c.
d.
e.
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
51701 Wonder-Prime Interior All Purpose Latex Primer
Sealer & Vapor Barrier.
UH400 Ultra Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoat
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A.
Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat
materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
PAINTING
09910 - 5
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint.
a.
Devoe:
b.
c.
Glidden:
Moore:
d.
e.
PPG:
S-W:
15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House
Paint.
3525 Spred Glide-On.
Moore's Flat Exterior Latex Masonry & House Paint
#105.
72 Line Sun-Proof Acrylic Latex House Paint.
A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A-6 Series.
Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather-resistant, air-drying, high-gloss enamel.
a.
Devoe:
b.
c.
d.
e.
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd-Urethane Gloss
Enamel.
4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
Exterior Textured Elastomeric Acrylic Emulsion Coating: Factory-formulated
sand textured finish per Sonneborn; Sonocoat Flex Tex, textured elastomeric
acrylic emulsion coating, or equal.
2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A.
Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat
materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Latex Semi-Gloss:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Devoe:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
Wondertones Semi-Gloss, 38-XX.
5800 Spred Latex Low Lustre.
Moorcraft Latex Satin, 255.
Latex Semi-Gloss White 6-510.
SuperPaint Latex Semi-Gloss, A88 Series.
2.
Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor, alkyd
enamel.
a.
Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
b.
Glidden:
UH 8000 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
c.
Moore:
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
d.
PPG:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
PAINTING
09910 - 6
e.
4.
S-W:
Promar 200 Alkyd Semigloss Enamel (B34).
Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint
for interior application.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
Coronado; 28 Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Flat Paint: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.031 mm).
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 mm).
Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200
Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036
mm).
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD-FINISHING MATERIALS
A.
Wood-Finishing Materials:
Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, wood-finishing materials that are compatible with the substrate
and undercoats indicated.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating, oil-type wood stain.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Devoe:
Glidden:
Moore:
PPG:
S-W:
96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.
1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain.
77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
Oil Stain A-48 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for
compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be
thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
1.
2.
B.
Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and
conditions within a particular area.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1.
Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified
PAINTING
09910 - 7
over substrates primed by others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,
lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or
provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove
these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces.
Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items
reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of
substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease
prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from
the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the
manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify
Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat
material with substrates primed by others.
2.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement
plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted.
Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents.
Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view
smooth and dust off.
a.
PAINTING
Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint
manufacturer.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing
appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish
paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not
paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's printed directions.
Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic
acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove
acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before
painting.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After
priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
09910 - 8
b.
c.
d.
4.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been
shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign
substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
a.
b.
c.
5.
D.
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime
edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets,
counters, cases, and paneling.
When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat
of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system
manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification
SSPC-SP 10.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment
wash coat before priming.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint
manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based
solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's directions.
1.
2.
3.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free
of foreign materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film
and, if necessary, strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
B.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
1.
2.
PAINTING
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
09910 - 9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
D.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not
recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky
under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint
does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.
1.
2.
3.
E.
The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of
the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat
has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications
where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the
manufacturer's directions.
Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through
final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.
Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,
welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of
flat surfaces.
The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar
components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain
the system integrity and provide desired protection.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces
behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, nonspecular black paint.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up
painted.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Spray Equipment:
Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system
as recommended by the manufacturer.
PAINTING
09910 - 10
F.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to
items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces as directed by
Architect.
G.
Mechanical and electrical items to be painted are included in Division 15 and 16.
1.
Exposed Mechanical ductwork; piping and Electrical conduit paint colors are
specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively.
H.
Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled. Incomplete covering will require additional coats
as directed by Architect.
I.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or
finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to
ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface
of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays,
laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
K.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface
film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs,
brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.
L.
Provide satin finish for final coats.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other
discarded paint materials from the site.
1.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
PAINTING
09910 - 11
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
protective wrappings.
1.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated.
1.
B.
Dry film thickness applies to all coats including primer unless noted otherwise.
Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items.
1.
Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
thickness of not less than 2.5 mils, excluding primer.
a.
b.
C.
Primer: Ferrous metal primer.
First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
Zinc-Coated Metal:
1.
High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
thickness of not less than 4.0 mil.
a.
b.
D.
Total dry film
Total dry film
Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
Gypsum Drywall:
1.
Exterior Textured Elastomeric Acrylic Emulsion Coating:
textured finish required by manufacturer.
a.
2.
Factory-formulated sand
Sonneborn; Sonocoat Flex Tex, textured elastomeric acrylic emulsion coating.
Provide full texture one coat application as recommended by the manufacturer to
achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than .10 dry mils (0.25 mm).
Sand Finish Acrylic Finish: One finish coat over an exterior alkyd- or alkali-resistant
primer as recommended by manufacturer.
a.
b.
Primer: Exterior gypsum board primer.
Finish Coats: Exterior sand finish acrylic paint.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
PAINTING
09910 - 12
B.
Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1.
Latex, Flat and Semigloss: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness
not less than 3.3 mil.
a.
b.
C.
Stained Woodwork and Wood Doors:
1.
Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain plus filler on
open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat.
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain.
First Coat: Cut shellac.
Filler Coat: Paste wood filler.
Second and Third Coats: Oil rubbing varnish.
Ferrous Metal:
1.
Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness
not less than 2.5 mils, excluding primer.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Bottom coat: Primer.
First and Second Coat: Interior semigloss latex.
Primer: Ferrous metal primer.
Intermediate Coat: Same as top coat.
Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
Zinc-Coated Metal:
1.
Semigloss Finish: Two coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less
than 2.5 mils, excluding primer.
a.
b.
c.
Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
Intermediate Coat: Same as top coat.
Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel.
END OF SECTION 09910
PAINTING
09910 - 13
SECTION 10155 - SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes toilet compartments and urinal screens as follows:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Type: Solid, phenolic.
Compartment Style: Floor mounted, overhead braced.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet paper holders, grab bars,
purse shelves, and similar accessories. Toilet compartments to have Class A
rating.
2.
Division 3 "Concrete" for concrete slab.
3.
Division 9 for floor and wall finishes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified.
Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation.
Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen
assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
C.
Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet
accessories.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color samples consisting of sections of
actual units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type of compartment or screen indicated.
SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 1
1.4
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units
without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and
fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.2
Capitol Partitions, Inc.
Compression Polymers Group; Comtec Industries.
Partition Systems, Inc.; Columbia Partitions.
Santana Products, Inc.
General Partitions Corp.
Metpar Toilet Partitions.
Bobrick.
Columbia
Comtec Capitol Partitions
MATERIALS
General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness.
Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
A.
Solid, Phenolic: Solid phenolic. Provide units with eased edges and with minimum
3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick
panels and screens. Provide color as follows:
1.
Color: Through color, solid, as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 2
B.
Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not
less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match
hardware. Adjustable for sloped floors.
C.
Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels
and screens to walls and pilasters.
D.
Hardware and Accessories:
hardware and accessories.
E.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail
with antigrip profile in manufacturer's standard finish.
F.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel
or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type
heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3
Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for
compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive
compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B.
Floor Mounted Overhead Braced Compartments:
corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies.
C.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging
doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments
indicated to be handicapped accessible.
1.
2.
Provide manufacturer's standard
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
door open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with
combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access.
Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 3
3.
4.
5.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at out-swinging
doors or entrance screen doors.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide
units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped
accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units
rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm)
between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and
walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
B.
Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchors as indicated in the details, unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten
pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with bottom of pilasters
when doors are in closed position.
C.
Floor mounted pilaster set on sloped floors, coordinate finish measurements.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and
screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10155
SOLID PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155 - 4
SECTION 10426 – DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following types of signs:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Dimensional letters and numbers.
Cast metal plaque.
Exterior panel signs.
Interior panel signs
Refer to site drawings for exterior signs.
Refer to drawings for dimensional letters, plaque locations.
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification
signs.
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates
for mechanical equipment.
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for
electrical equipment.
Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated exit signs.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C.
Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and
large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1.
2.
Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of
wording and lettering layout.
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 1
3.
4.
D.
anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections.
Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted
dimensional letters and numbers.
Furnish full-size metal plaque layout drawing following approval of verbiage by
Owner.
Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of
color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with
requirements indicated.
1.
2.
Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a.
Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors
available for each material required.
b.
Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections
of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the
full range of colors available.
Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance
with requirements indicated:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
Panel Signs: Provide a full size sample panel for each material, color,
texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample
of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and
finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6-inch-long sections
of extrusions and not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate. Where
finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples of each
dimensional letter type required, showing letter style, color, and material
finish and method of attachment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those
indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and
sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in
the Work.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from
one source of a single manufacturer.
C.
Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 2
manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer.
1.5
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Contemporary Plastics, Inc.
Johnson Signs,
MAC Graphics,
Fast Signs
Mills Manufacturing.
Innerface.
Dura Architectural Signage
Nelson Harkins.
Corner Stone Signs
Sign International, Inc.
Best
American Graphics, Inc.
Andco Industries Corp.
ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
Fast Signs.
Best Manufacturing.
Contemporary Plastics, Inc.
Nelson Harkins, Johnson Signs
A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Mills Manufacturing.
Manufacturers of Cast Plaques:
a.
Andco Industries Corp.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 3
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.2
A.
A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Best Manufacturing Company.
Fast Signs.
Nelson Harkins.
Grandview Aluminum Products, Inc.
Mills Manufacturing.
MATERIALS
Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate
monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural
strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum
allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following
general types:
1.
2.
Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "opaque," provide colored
opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's
standards.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks
and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic
manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the
application intended.
B.
Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by
the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated.
C.
Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch minimum thickness,
with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior as well as interior
applications in colors as selected from the manufacturer's standards.
D.
ABS Plastic:
Provide high-impact thermoplastic composed of copolymers of
acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene.
E.
Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the
sign material and mounting surface.
F.
Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and
inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use
toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish
inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
G.
Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper recommended by the
sign manufacturer per the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the
strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 4
2.3
A.
PANEL SIGNS – REFER TO PROJECT DRAWINGS
Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes,
colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1.
2.
B.
Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured
diagonally.
Provide name slot in panel sign type “C” as shown on project drawings.
Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished
to conform with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Edge Condition: Square cut.
Corner Condition: Corners rounded to 1/2 inch radius.
C.
Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded
aluminum to suit sign panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factorypaint brackets in a color matching the background color of the sign panel.
D.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements
indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of
letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.
E.
Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet
and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely
formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
A.
Panel Material: Matte-finished clear acrylic with opaque color coating subsurface
applied. Minimum 1/8 inch thick material.
Raised Copy Thickness: 1/32 inch.
Letter Height: As approved by Architect from submittals.
Letter Style: Optima semi-bold throughout project with
exception of dimensional letters on exterior.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Produce precisely cast characters with square cut,
smooth edges. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Aluminum
Letter Height: Refer to drawings
Letter Style: Optima, all capitals.
Finish/Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of
available colors.
Depth: 1".
Mechanical attachment, concealed fasteners
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 5
2.5
A.
CAST METAL PLAQUES
Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. Comply
with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and
with requirements shown for thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff
borders and raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish.
Refer to the "Finish" Article for other finish requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Size: 24 inches by 36 inches.
Metal: Aluminum.
Border Style: No. 5 double raised line border as manufactured by Mills
Manufacturing or equal.
Rosettes: No. 2 type as manufactured by Mills Manufacturing or equal.
Text: Unlimited text as supplied by Architect after bidding.
Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture.
Background Finish: Provide the manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish
(Color to be selected by Architect).
FINISHES
A.
Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of
materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related
to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the
Architect from the manufacturer's standards.
B.
Metal Finishes:
Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish
designations and applications recommendations.
C.
Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1.
Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Finish: AA-M31C21A31 (Mechanical Finish:
Fine satin directional textured; Chemical Finish: Fine matte etched finish;
Anodic Coating: Class II Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).
2.
Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical Finish: Manufacturer's
standard, other nondirectional textured; Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion
coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint manufacturer's
specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.
a.
Organic Coating: Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer/topcoat
system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
1)
Color: As selected by the Architect from the mnfr.'s standard colors.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of
the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.
2.
Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
Mounting Location:
a.
b.
B.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods
indicated below:
1.
C.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the
sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape to hold the sign in place until the adhesive
has fully cured.
Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening
methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall
construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to
establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. Mount letters at locations as
indicated on drawings.
1.
E.
Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the
sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered
surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign
manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.
Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods
indicated below:
1.
D.
Mounting location shall be 60" above finished floor to the sign centerline.
Mounting distance from door/window jambs shall be 2" from edge of frame
to edge of sign, unless otherwise.
Notify Architect of any signs which cannot be mounted as specified and
obtain alternate location from Architect.
Projected Mounting:
surface of 1/2 inch.
Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall
Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended by the
manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 7
3.2
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's
instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10426
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS & NUMBERS, PLAQUES, SIGNS
10426 - 8
SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
Portable fire extinguishers.
Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
Fire-protection accessories.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.
1.
2.
B.
Fire extinguishers.
Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods,
relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet
type, trim style, and panel style.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a
single manufacturer.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate, label and install fire extinguishers to comply with
NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Provide extinguishers listed and labeled by FM.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Portable Fire Extinguishers:
a.
b.
2.
Fire-Protection Cabinets:
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.2
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Modern Metal Products; Div. of Technico.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated for each designation in the Fire-Protection Cabinet Schedule at the end of
Part 3.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M,
commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled.
B.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer
for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666/A 666M, Type 302 or Type 304 alloy.
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and
other locations indicated.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg) nominal
capacity, in enameled-steel container.
2.4
A.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520 - 2
and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. Provide fire rated cabinet
construction at all rated wall locations.
B.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:
1.
C.
Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1.
D.
Fire extinguisher.
Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit
style of trim indicated. Adjust recess and trim as required for wall thickness.
Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.
1.
Exposed Trim:
One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at
outer edge (backbend).
a.
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1.
F.
Same metal and finish as door.
Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1.
G.
Steel sheet.
Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
as follows:
a.
H.
Class 1 (clear).
Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows:
1.
I.
Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
Fully glazed panel with frame.
Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials
indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
Provide minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick door frames, fabricated with tubular
stiles and rails, and hollow-metal design.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520 - 3
J.
2.5
A.
Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper
type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide exposed
or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge
permitting door to open 180 degrees. Provide lock with two (2) keys.
ACCESSORIES
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of
sizes required for types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or bakedenamel finish.
1.
2.
B.
Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets.
Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
2.
Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"
in red letter decals applied to wall surface.
Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"
applied to door.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Application Process: Silk-screened.
Application Process: Vinyl letters.
Lettering Color: Red.
Orientation: Vertical.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces
are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are
assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the
following:
1.
2.
Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive
another finish.
Interior of cabinets and doors.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed
and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1.
C.
3.2
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.
B.
Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated to comply with applicable
regulation of NFPAIO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
Mount fire extinguisher on bracket with top of extinguisher 54” above finished
floor.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520 - 5
SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled on drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.
B.
ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and ChromiumNickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
C.
ASTM A 554 - Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.
D.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
E.
ASTM F 446 - Standard Consumer Safety Specification for Grab bars and Accessories Installed
In the Bathing Area.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specifications Sections.
B.
Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to
materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C.
Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations.
D.
Shop Drawings:
1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project.
2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each product.
3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and
reinforcement and materials required for installation of specified product.
E.
Closeout submittals: Warranty issued and executed by manufacturer and countersigned by the
Contractor.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801 - 1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and anchoring
devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work
to avoid delay.
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory
unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of five years documented experience producing product
specified.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to
avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and
servicing of toilet accessory items.
B.
Unacceptable conditions: Any condition deemed unacceptable by the Architect shall be corrected
before installation begins.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period.
B.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories
by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A & J Washroom Accessories.
American Specialties, Inc. (**)
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
General Accessory Manufacturing Co.
McKinney/Parker.
World Dryer (Hand Dryers).
Frost Products Limited
** Denotes manufacturer upon which products and model numbers are listed on Toilet Accessories
Schedule and the level of quality required.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801 - 2
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch (0.9
mm) minimum thickness.
B.
Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, baked acrylic enamel coating.
C.
Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2,
and with silvering, electro- plated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with
FS DD-M-411.
D.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
E.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized
steel where concealed.
F.
Refer to Drawings for specific accessory model numbers and locations. Model numbers are
based upon American Specialties, Inc. and represent configuration and level of quality required.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each
accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating
manufacturer's name and product model number.
B.
Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units
with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C.
Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of allwelded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length,
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.
D.
Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood,
felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system
that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation.
E.
Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid,
tamperproof, and theft-proof installation.
F.
Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for
servicing, re-supply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801 - 3
A.
Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or
screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's
instructions for type of substrate involved.
C.
Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1100 N), complying with
ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly.
Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after
removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
3.3
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Toilet Accessory Schedule on PROJECT DRAWINGS.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10801 - 4
SECTION 12304 - LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special
Conditions and Division 1 - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Refer to Division 06 for countertops not installed on Division 12 casework.
SUMMARY:
A.
Type, size, location and extent of cabinets and casework is indicated on drawings.
B.
Installation of sink units mounted in countertops is specified in a Division 15
section. At 34” height casework dimension to be measured from sink rim to
finish floor. Coordinate top depth as required to comply with ADA.
C.
Electrical connections as specified..
WORK INCLUDED:
A.
The extent of manufactured casework systems as shown on drawings, schedules,
and specified herein. Where specific materials, finishes, construction details, and
hardware are specified herein, the casework contractor shall be held in strict
accordance. All items shall be as provided, and publicly cataloged, by one
manufacturer to assure physical and dimensional integrity of the system and ready
access to additional systems components for a minimum of ten (10) years after
completion of this contract.
Product from companies not meeting this
requirement will not be accepted.
B.
Furnish all items of equipment as listed in the Specifications, Equipment Schedule
and/or as shown on the drawings including delivery to the buildings, unpacking,
setting in place, leveling, shimming and scribing to walls and floors as required.
C.
Stainless steel sinks and fixtures within plastic laminate tops shall be provided
and installed under Division 15. (Opening to be furnished by casework supplier.)
WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A.
The furnishing, installation and connection of any service lines, drainlines, traps,
piping, wire and conduit within the equipment and through, under, or along the
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 1
backs of working surfaces as required by the specifications and/or as shown on the
drawings unless otherwise indicated. Installation of sinks and service fixtures and
final connection of all services.
1.5
B.
The furnishing, installing and connecting of all vents, revents and special
plumbing fixtures or piping to meet local codes, even though not specifically
called for in the specifications and/or shown on the drawings.
C.
The furnishing of any framing or reinforcements for walls, floors or ceilings to
support any equipment.
D.
The furnishing and installation of specified resilient base finish for all casework.
This work is part of a Division 9 Section.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
1.6
All manufactured casework shall be pre-engineered, and cataloged, to rigid
modular-matrix sizing allowing for future interchange of components, or entire
units. Manufacturers submitting for approval must provide printed catalog
information documenting this performance feature; no exceptions will be allowed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Manufacturer’s products shall be publicly catalogued. Manufacturer will show
evidence of a minimum of five (5) years experience in providing manufactured
casework systems for similar types of projects, produce evidence of financial
stability, bonding capacity and adequate facilities and personnel required to
perform on this project.
B.
Any manufacturers not listed under Part 2 – Products, paragraph 2.1 Acceptable
Manufacturer shall be certified by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)
Quality Certification Program and register this project with AWI/OCP. Work in
this section shall comply with the specified grades of work written herein and
sections 400 and 1600 of the 7th edition of the Architectural Woodwork Institute
Quality Standards.
All Casework On This Project Must Display AWI Quality
Certification Labels in accordance with AWI/QCP labeling guidelines.
C.
Manufactured casework systems must conform to design, quality of materials,
workmanship and function as shown on drawing and specified herein. In the
absence of a printed specification, minimum quality standards shall be in
accordance with AWI Section 1600B, Sixth Edition, Version 1.1, no exceptions
will be permitted; additional requirements shall be as specified herein.
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 2
1.7
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data:
1.
B.
Samples:
1.
2.
C.
2.
3.
1.9
Submit samples of casework manufacturer's standard decorative laminate
colors, patterns, and textures for exposed and semi-exposed materials for
architect's selection. Samples of other materials or hardware shall be made
available if requested.
Architect may request representative full-size samples for evaluation prior
to approval. Samples may be impounded by architect/owner until
completion of project to ensure compliance with specifications.
Production Drawings:
1.
1.8
In addition to the general conditions as relates to prior approvals,
SUBMITTALS of manufacturer's data, installation instructions, and
samples are required.
Submit production drawings for casework systems and countertops
showing layout, elevations, ends, cross-sections, face modular values,
service run spaces and location of services.
Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows,
and other building components.
Coordinate production drawings with other work involved.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
A.
Deliver laminate clad casework and countertops only after wet operations in
building are completed. Schedule with General Contractor.
B.
Store completed laminate clad casework and countertops in a ventilated place,
protected from the weather, with relative humidity range of 20% to 50%.
C.
Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and
installation. Keep covered with a protective covering.
JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
Humidity and Temperature Controls:
1.
Advise contractor of requirements for maintaining heating, cooling, and
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 3
ventilation in installation areas as required to reach relative humidity
necessary to maintain optimum moisture content.
1.10
WARRANTY:
A.
Manufactured products carry a three (3) year Guaranty to the original Owner
against defective material and workmanship. This is a warranty of replacement
and repair for defects in material and/or workmanship without charge.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Manufacturer and Product Type: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Construction features to be in accordance with TMI catalogued
TRIMLINE built-in storage systems, that are fully modular and
dimensionally integrated to allow owner interchange of doors, drawers and
interior components. TMI Systems Design Corporation, 50 South Third
Avenue West, Dickinson, North Dakota, 58601.
LSI.
Stevens Industries, Inc.
Reynolds & Doyle, Inc.
PR Bean Co. LLC
SSC Casework
DEFINITIONS AND MATERIALS:
Listed are definitions and materials commonly used in defining decorative laminate clad
casework. Refer to FABRICATION section for those items selected for use on this
project.
A.
Definitions: Identification of casework parts by surface visibility.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open Interiors: Any open storage unit without solid door or drawer fronts
and units with full glass doors.
Closed Interiors: Any closed storage unit behind solid door or drawer
fronts, glass insert doors, sliding solid doors, and/or acrylic doors.
Exposed Ends: Any storage unit exterior side surface that is visible after
installation.
Other Exposed Surfaces: Faces of doors and drawers when closed, tops of
cabinets less than 72" above finished floor.
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 4
5.
6.
B.
Core Materials:
1.
2.
C.
Particleboard: Medium density 45-50 pound western particleboard of fir
or pine meeting or exceeding ANSI A 208.1-1993, M-3 requirements.
Thicknesses used are 1/4", 1/2", 3/4", and 1".
Hardboard: Prefinished hardboard in 1/4" thickness meeting or exceeding
commercial standards CS-251.
Decorative Laminates/Veneer Where Applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Interior surfaces which are visible, bottoms of
wall cabinets and tops of cabinets 72" or more above finished floor.
Concealed Surfaces: Any surface not normally visible after installation.
High pressure decorative laminate GP28 (.028), NEMA
Test LD3 - 1991.
High pressure decorative laminate GP50 (.050), NEMA
Test LD-3 - 1991.
High pressure decorative laminate PF42 (.042), NEMA
Test LD-3 - 1991.
High Pressure cabinet liner CL20 (.020), NEMA Test LD-3 - 1991.
Thermally-fused melamine laminate tested to meet NEMA Test LD-3 1991.
High pressure backer BK20 (.020).
Laminate Color Selection:
1.
Basic cabinet body color:
a.
b.
2.
3.
To include surfaces of all components, including drawer
boxes, to be covered with melamine laminate as a minimum
requirement; drawer boxes not matching basic color will be
rejected.
Thermally-fused melamine laminate shall be available in
manufacturer's full range of colors.
Colors for other cabinet surfaces, grade GP28, shall be selected from the
current year WilsonArt series. A maximum of one (1) color to be selected
per unit face and five (5) colors per project. Minimum of 120 color
selections available.
Colors for countertop grades, GP50 and PF42, shall be selected from
the current year WilsonArt standard solid and pattern offering. A
maximum of five (5) colors per project.
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 5
E.
Edging Materials / Colors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
SPECIALTY ITEMS:
A.
Metal Parts:
1.
2.4
1mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive.
3mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive
with external edges and outside corners of door and drawer fronts, and
countertops, machine profiled to 1/8" radius for safety.
PVC banding shall be available in full range of manufacturer’s colors.
Barbed T-edging or laminate self edge on cabinet components will not be
acceptable.
Glass insert doors in built-in casework shall be glazed with 1/8" D.S.A.
glass. In relocatable casework shall be glazed with clear 1/4" thick sheet
acrylic, stipple finish.
Sliding glass doors shall be clear 1/4" thick sheet acrylic, stipple finish,
mounted in aluminum track.
Provide extruded rigid PVC of design to hold and trim glass inserts in
framed doors. Available in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match
basic cabinet body, or in contrasting slate grey or black color.
Countertop support brackets, undercounter support frames, legs and
miscellaneous metal parts shall be furniture steel, welded, degreased,
cleaned, treated and epoxy powder painted in dove grey, frosty white or
light beige to match basic cabinet body color, or in a contrasting slate grey
or black color.
CABINET HARDWARE:
A.
Hinges:
1.
B.
Shall be five knuckle, 2-3/4", overlay type, hospital tip, .095" thick steel.
Hinges shall have a minimum of eight (8) edge and leaf fastenings. Doors
48 inches and over in height shall have three (3) hinges per door.
Available in epoxy finish, color to be dove grey, frosty white or light beige
to match basic cabinet body color, or in contrasting black, sienna brown or
brushed chrome. Provide magnetic door catch with minimum ten (10)
pound pull, attached with screws and slotted for adjustment.
Pulls:
1.
Door and drawer front pulls shall be rectangular semi-recessed, injection
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 6
molded ABS plastic, glue and screw-fastened. Available in dove grey,
frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color or in
contrasting black or sienna brown.
C.
Drawer Slides:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Adjustable Shelf Supports:
1.
E.
Shall be injection molded polycarbonate, clear color to blend with selected
interior finish, friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers,
readily adjustable on 32mm (approximately 1-1/4") centers. Each shelf
support shall have two (2) integral support pins, 5mm diameter, to
interface pre-drilled holes, and to prevent accidental rotation of support.
The supports shall be automatically adaptable to 3/4" or 1" thick shelving
and shall provide non-tip feature for shelving. Supports are designed to
readily permit field fixing of shelf if desired. Structural load testing shall
show loading to 1,500 pounds (375 pounds per support) without failure.
Locks:
1.
2.
F.
Shall be Blum style No. BS230M with epoxy finish. Slides will have a
100 pound load rating at full extension a built-in, positive stop both
directions, with self-closing feature. Slides shall have a lifetime warranty
as offered by the slide manufacturer.
File drawer slides shall be Blum BS430E full extension. Slides shall have
a lifetime warranty as offered by the slide manufacturer.
Kneespace and pencil drawers shall be equipped with Blum No. 320 for
undercounter or support frame mounting.
For doors and drawers as shown on drawings shall be National Lock #M47054C, removable core, disc tumbler, cam style lock with strike. Each
lock shall be furnished with two (2) keys. Locks for sliding 3/4" doors
shall be a disc type plunger lock, sliding door type with strike. Locks for
sliding glass/acrylic doors shall be a ratchet type sliding showcase lock.
Chain bolts shall be 3" long, shall have a 18" pull and an angle strike to
secure inactive door on cabinets over 72" in height. Elbow catches shall
be used on inactive doors up to and including 72" in height.
Sliding Door Track:
1.
For both glass and wood sliding doors shall be anodized aluminum double
channel.
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 7
G.
Pendaflex File Suspension Rails:
1.
H.
Undercounter Support Frame:
1.
2.5
All file drawers shall include a pair of 14 gauge steel pendaflex file
suspension rails, epoxy coated in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to
match basic cabinet color. File followers, or other split bottom hardware,
shall not be acceptable.
Welded steel countertop support frames shall be provided at all kneespaces
where indicated on drawings. Frames shall be available in 3" increments
to clear span 24" to 60" width. Frames shall readily accept pencil and
kneespace drawers, and shall be designed to interface undercounter
support brackets. Available in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to
match basic cabinet body color or in contrasting slate grey or black color.
FABRICATION:
A.
Fabricate casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.
B.
Cabinet Body Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tops and bottoms shall be joined to cabinet ends and internal cabinet
components such as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals shall be joined
using 10mm diameter industrial grade hardwood dowels, laterally fluted
with chamfered ends, securely glued and clamped under pressure during
assembly to secure joints and cabinet squareness. Use minimum of six (6)
dowels at each joint for 24" deep cabinets and minimum of four (4) dowels
at each joint for 12" deep cabinets.
Unless specifically indicated, core shall be 3/4" thick particleboard.
Edging and surface finishes as indicated herein.
Unit backs on fixed cabinetry shall be 1/4" thick prefinished hardboard
and on relocatable cabinetry, backs shall be 3/4" thick particleboard
structurally doweled into cabinet end and top panels, color matched to
cabinet interior. Exposed backs on fixed or movable cabinets to be 3/4"
thick particleboard, color matched to cabinet interior, exterior surface GP28 laminate as selected.
All fixed undercounter and tall units shall have an integral base created by
extending end panels to floor and factory applied blocking between sides.
Provide 96mm (nominal 4") high toe base unless otherwise indicated on
the drawings.
All undercounter units except sink base units, shall be provided with full
sub-top. Sink base units shall be provided with open top, front welded
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 8
6.
7.
steel/epoxy painted sink rail full width at top front edge concealed behind
face rail/doors, split back removable access panels and bottom panel to
have CL-20 high pressure cabinet liner both faces, color to match interior
color. No exceptions will be permitted.
All end panels and vertical dividers, except sink base units, shall be
prepared to receive adjustable shelf hardware at 32mm (approximately 11/4") centers. Door hinges, drawer slides and pull-out shelves shall mount
on line boring to maintain vertical alignment of components and provide
for future relocation of doors, drawers, shelves and/or pull-out shelves.
All exposed and semi exposed edges of basic cabinet components shall be
factory edged with PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot
melt adhesive.
a.
8.
Adjustable shelf core shall be 3/4" thick particleboard up to 30" wide, 1"
thick particleboard over 30" wide.
a.
9.
Sides, top, bottom, horizontal and vertical members and adjustable
shelving faced with melamine laminate with matching prefinished
back. Available in dove grey, frosty white or light beige color.
Exposed Ends:
a.
12.
Sides, top, bottom, horizontal and vertical members and adjustable
shelving faced with melamine laminate with matching prefinished
back. Available in dove grey, frosty white or light beige color
Interior Finish, Units with Closed Interiors:
a.
11.
Front edge shall have factory applied 1mm PVC, color to match
shelf color.
Interior Finish, Units with Open Interiors:
a.
10.
Edging shall be 1mm PVC, available in dove grey, frosty white or
light beige to match basic cabinet body color.
Shall be faced with high pressure decorative laminate GP-28 (.028)
color from casework manufacturer's full range offering of at least
120 colors.
Wall Unit Bottom:
a.
Shall be faced with melamine laminate in dove grey, frosty white
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 9
or light beige to match basic cabinet body color.
13.
Wall and Tall Unit Tops:
a.
b.
14.
C.
Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished
core stock, even on concealed surfaces, will not be permitted. No
exceptions.
Drawers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
The top edge of all wall and tall unit end panels shall be factory
edged with 1mm PVC to match basic cabinet body color; raw
edges at top of wall and tall end panels will not be permitted.
Top surface will be laminated with melamine in dove grey, frosty
white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color.
Sides, back and sub front shall be particleboard, 1/2" thick, laminated with
melamine in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet
body color. The back and sub front are doweled and glued into the sides.
Dowels shall be fluted, with chamfered ends and a minimum diameter of
8mm. Top edge is banded with 1mm PVC edging in a matching color.
Drawer bottom shall be particleboard, 1/2" thick, laminated with melamine
in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color,
screwed directly to the bottom edges of the drawer box. Drawer bottom
less than 1/2" thick will not be permitted.
Paper storage drawers are constructed similar except retaining hood shall
be included at the rear of each drawer.
Painted finishes on drawer sides and/or bottom will not be permitted.
Door/Drawer Fronts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Core for all doors and applied drawer fronts shall be 3/4" thick
particleboard. All edges shall be finished as indicated herein.
Double doors shall be used on all cabinets in excess of 24" wide.
Exterior faces shall be laminated with high pressure decorative laminate
GP-28, color as selected, high pressure cabinet liner CL20 in dove grey,
frosty white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color on inside
surface.
All edges shall be finished with 3mm PVC available in dove grey, frosty
white or light beige to match basic cabinet body color or in contrasting
black, sienna brown, dawn, wildrose, clear teal, hollyberry or larkspur
colors. External edges and outside corners shall be machine profiled to
1/8" radius.
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 10
E.
2.6
Double tier 13-1/2” w x 34-3/4” h (one tier) plastic laminate lockers to have the
following: Built-in combination lock, master key control, side panel at end
conductions, number plate – 27368 by Salbury Industries with S style door
configuration for increase storage height of 40-3/4” is the lockers style as the
basis-of-design.
DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS:
A.
All nominal 1 1/2" thick laminate clad countertops shown on drawings shall be
constructed with 3/4" particleboard core laminated top face with GP50 1/8” high
pressure decorative laminate, with BK20 backer underside. Provide tight joint
fasteners where needed. All exposed edges, including edges of backsplash where
used, shall have 3mm PVC banding, machine applied with waterproof hot melt
adhesive. Exposed edges and corners shall be machine profiled to 1/8" radius for
safety. Edging shall be available in dove grey, frosty white or light beige to match
basic cabinet body color or in contrasting black, slate grey, dawn, wildrose, clear
teal, hollyberry, or larkspur colors.
1.
B.
Sinks Drop In – Refer to Plumbing.
Refer to project drawings for locations of solid surface countertops in lieu of
plastic laminate countertops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION:
A.
3.2
PREPARATION:
A.
3.3
The installer must examine the job site and the conditions under which the work
under this section is to be performed, and notify the contractor in writing of
unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work under this section until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
installer.
Condition casework to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
prior to installing.
INSTALLATION:
Filler Panels:
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 11
A.
Install casework with factory-trained supervision authorized by manufacturer.
Erect casework, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as
required. Where laminate clad casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut
to accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips and mouldings as indicated or
required, and in finish to match cabinet face.
B.
Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly
without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
Attach countertops securely to base units which have been installed level. Spline
and glue joints in countertops; provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint.
Provide cut-outs for fixtures and appliances as indicated; drill pilot holes at
corners before making cut-outs. Smooth cut edges and coat with waterproof
coating or adhesive.
The shimming of countertops to achieve a level installation where base cabinets
have not been installed level is not acceptable.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of
installation.
B.
Clean plastic surfaces, repair minor damage per plastic laminate manufacturer's
recommendations. Replace other damaged parts or units.
C.
Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of casework and
tops from damage by other trades until acceptance of the work by the Owner. If
required cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene protective enclosure,
applied in a manner to allow easy removal without damaging cabinets. Remove
cover immediately before time of final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 12304
LAMINATE CLAD CASEWORK
12304 - 12